1993 Specifications CSJ 0907-16-003
SPECIAL SPECIFICATION 3603 Ozona Visitor Center
1. Description. This Item shall govern for furnishing all materials, equipment, labor and incidentals necessary for the Ozona Visitor Center in Ozona, Texas. 2. Materials and Construction Methods. All materials furnished and all construction methods utilized shall be in accordance with the plans, details and the attached specifications. 3. Measurement. This item will be measured by the lump sum. 4. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided for under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Ozona Visitor Center.” This price shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work specified.
1-294 3603 11-03
2-294 3603 11-03
3-294 3603 11-03 Table of Contents
DIVISION SC - SPECIAL CONDITIONS 8 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 10 01010 - GENERAL 10 01050 - SUMMARY OF WORK 11 01100 - SCHEDULES AND REPORTS 12 01200 - MATERIALS, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS 13 01300 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES...... 14 01400 - CLEANING UP 15 01410 - TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 16 01500 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT 20 01700 - GUARANTEES, MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS MANUALS REQUIREMENTS 21 01800 - BARRICADES, SIGNS AND TRAFFIC HANDLING 22 01900 - STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION AND EROSION CONTROL 23 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 24 02100 - CLEARING 24 02210 - SITE GRADING 26 02215 - EXCAVATION 28 02220 - BACKFILLING 30 02250 - SOIL POISONING 32 02362 - DRILLED PIER FOUNDATIONS 33 02513 - ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 35 02666 - REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 38 02613 - CONCRETE BRICK PAVING 40 02750 - IRRIGATION SYSTEM 41 02800 - LANDSCAPING 50 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 68 03001 - FORMWORK 68 03150 - EXPANSION JOINTS IN EXTERIOR SLABS ON FILL 70 4-294 3603 11-03 03200 - REINFORCING 71 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 72 03350 - FINISHING AND CURING CONCRETE 77 03450 - PRECAST CONCRETE 81 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 85 04400 - STONE WORK 85 DIVISION 5 - METALS 88 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL 88 05400 - LIGHT GAGE METAL FRAMING 92 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METAL 95 DIVISION 6 - CARPENTRY 96 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY 96 06113 - SHEATHING 98 06180 - GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS 99 06192 - FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 102 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY 104 06400 - CUSTOM WOODWORK 106 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 108 07110 - MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING 108 07160 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 109 07170 - EXTERIOR DAMPPROOFING 110 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION 111 07410 - PREFORMED METAL ROOF 112 07600 - SHEET METAL WORK 113 07700 - WALL FLASHING 114 07900 - CAULKING AND SEALANTS 115 DIVISION 8 - DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS 116 08100 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES 116 08120 - ALUMINUM. WINDOWS, DOORS, FRAMES, & STOREFRONTS 118 08200 - WOOD DOORS 120 08700 - FINISH HARDWARE 121
5-294 3603 11-03 08730 - WEATHERSTRIPPING 125 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING 126 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 127 09110 - LATHING 127 09180 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 128 09260 - GYPSUM DRYWALL SYSTEM 131 09300 - CERAMIC TILE 133 09330 - QUARRY TILE 135 09510 -ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM 136 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 138 09682 - CARPET 140 09900 - PAINTING 142 09952 - WALL COVERING 147 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 148 10162 - METAL TOILET PARTITIONS 148 10350 - FLAG POLES 150 10400 - IDENTIFYING DEVICES 151 10520 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 152 10800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES 153 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 155 15000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL 155 15100 - SITE UTILITIES 167 15110 - NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS 173 15140 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 184 15190 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 190 15260 - PIPING INSULATION 194 15270 - DUCT INSULATION 198 15410 - PLUMBING PIPING 200 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 209 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES 213 15800 - HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 217
6-294 3603 11-03 15840 - DUCTWORK 224 15850 - HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT 229 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 236 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 240 16000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL 240 16110 - CONDUIT 245 16120 - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 251 16130 - BOXES 258 16140 - WIRING DEVICES 262 16160 - CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS 266 16170 - GROUNDING AND BONDING 268 16190 - SUPPORTING DEVICES 271 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 273 16420 - UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE 276 16470 - PANELBOARDS 278 16530 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING 288 16780 - COMMUNICATIONS AND COMPUTER SYSTEMS 292
7-294 3603 11-03 DIVISION SC – SPECIAL CONDITIONS
SC:00 – SPECIAL CONDITIONS A. The listing herein of article or material, operation or method, required that the Contractor shall provide each item listed of quality, or subject to qualifications noted; and the Contractor shall perform each operation prescribed according to conditions stated, providing therefore all necessary labor, equipment and incidentals.
SC:01 – SALES TAX A. The owner is exempt from State and local sales tax. A tax exempt certificate will be provided for the Contractor before the start of the work.
SC:02 – FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS A. The following safeguards should be taken during any construction or alteration: 1. The General Contractor shall be required to take necessary precautions to eliminate possible fire hazards and to prevent damage to any construction work, building materials, equipment and other property, both public and private, involved in or adjacent to the project. 2. Paint, paint thinners, gasoline, oil or any other flammable liquids, should not be stored within properties under construction. 3. All combustible debris should be removed from inside buildings at the close of every work day. 4. No combustible materials shall be stored inside the building addition. 5. Cutting and welding operations should be discouraged; however, if unavoidable, they should be performed in strict accordance with requirements of NFPA Pamphlet 51B, “Cutting and Welding Processes.”
SC:03 – LOCAL LABOR A. The Contractor is encouraged to use local labor, but not at the expense of poor workmanship and high cost. However, all things being equal, local workmen shall be given preference.
SC:04 - TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION A. Provide any temporary guards or fences required by the city.
SC:05 - PATCHING AND CLEANING EXISTING WORK A. Clean, patch and finish any existing work that is unsightly or damaged due to new construction.
SC:06 - PROTECTION AND ACCESS
8-294 3603 11-03 A. The Contractor shall adequately protect the adjacent property at all times, and shall make good at his own expense any damage to such property arising out of any operation connected with his Contract. B. The Contractor shall at all times provide protection against weather (rain, wind, storms, frost or heat) so as to maintain all work, materials, apparatus and fixtures from injury or damage. At the end of the day’s work all new or old work likely to be damaged shall be covered. C. The Contractor shall so store, pile and arrange his materials that they will not be injured by the elements, by progress, or erection, by contact with the ground or from any other cause. He shall provide and do all covering for this purpose and shall remove from the premises any damaged materials when so directed by the Architect. D. The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall carefully consider material storage so as to avoid interference with other phases of construction. E. The Contractor shall enforce the Architect’s instructions regarding signs, advertisements and fires.
SC:07 - NOTIFICATIONS A. The Contractor shall give the Architect verbal notification at least 48 hours prior to commencing any of the following: (1) excavation, (2) concrete pour and (3) testing of water lines. (Not limited to this list, refer to Specifications.)
SC:08 - CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of his work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and fit it to receive or be received by work of other Contractors shown upon, or reasonably implied by the Drawings or Specifications. B. Any cost caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the party responsible therefore.
SC:09 - SAFETY A. Authority: Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, (84 Stat. 1593, 1600;29 U.S.C. 655, 657), Chapter XVII of Title 29, amended to add Part 1910. 1. Title 29 - Labor: All of Part 1910 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards and All of Part 1926 - Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, and Part 1926 of Title 29 - Code to Federal Regulations.
SC:10 - PRESIDENTIAL EXECUTIVE ORDER # 10925 A. Contractors, in performing work under this Contract, shall not discriminate against any applicant for employment, or any employee, because of race, creed, or national origin, in compliance with the Presidential Executive Order # 10925, as amended.
9-294 3603 11-03 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010 – GENERAL
A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, appliances, services and facilities; perform work and services for accomplishment and completion of all work of construction indicated on drawings and described in these specifications, in accordance with all portions of Contract Documents, Change Orders issued thereto, and City Building Codes. 1. Items of work or materials indicated on drawings as "not in Contract' (nic) or mentioned in specifications to be furnished by Owner, are not to be included in proposal. 2. Contractor shall cooperate with others employed separately by Owner for particular equipment installation or performing special work relating to this project, and shall protect all such installation or materials. 3. Owner retains right at all times to deliver, place, and install materials as work progresses where there is not interference with Contractor. Such preliminary occupancy shall not be construed as acceptance of such portions.
B. Drawings will indicate dimensions, position and kind of construction. 1. Indication on the Drawings or mention in the specifications of articles, operations or methods requires that the Contractor provide each item indicated or mentioned of the quality or subject to the qualifications noted; perform according to conditions stated for each operation described; and provide all necessary labor, equipment, services, and incidentals.
10-294 3603 11-03 01050 - SUMMARY OF WORK
A. Scope: 1. This contract consists of the construction of the Ozona Visitor Center, Crockett County, Ozona, Texas. 2. This project includes all divisions of the work, General, Mechanical and Electrical, under a single contract. 3. Items furnished by Owner and installed by Contractor as shown on drawings.
11-294 3603 11-03 01100 - SCHEDULES AND REPORTS
A. STANDARD FORMS: Standard Forms to be used in the administration of this Contract shall be TxDOT Forms.
B. TEST RESULTS 1. Test reports on concrete will be sent directly to the Architect by the testing laboratory on the laboratory’s standard form. 2. Tests for concrete shall be paid for by the general Contractor, see Division 3 - Concrete. 3. Where in the opinion of the Architect or as called for in the specifications. 4. All testing will be made in accordance with the latest method of ASTM. 5. Payment for re-testing: should the results of the laboratory tests indicate that the material or workmanship fails to comply with the requirements of the specifications, the work shall be removed or reworked until it does satisfy the requirements. The final results shall be verified as acceptable by laboratory tests which shall be paid for by the specific Contractor, at his own expense.
C. SUPPLEMENTAL SCHEDULES 1. Color schedules, related material selections and supplementary schedules shall be furnished by the Architect.
12-294 3603 11-03 01200 - MATERIALS, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A. SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 1. Whenever a material or equipment is identified on the drawings or in the specifications by reference to a particular name, brand or number, it is for the purpose of establishing a standard, and any other similar item which will perform adequately the duties imposed by the general design will be considered equally acceptable provided the item is, in the opinion of the Architect, of equal substance, appearance and function. 2. It shall not be purchased or installed without written approval.
B. REQUIRED 1. Specific shop drawings and samples as stipulated within the various Specifications. Submit a minimum of six (6) copies of shop drawings. The Architect will keep three (3) of these copies. Refer various sections for additional copies. 2. Submission and administration of required shop drawings and samples shall conform to the stipulations of Article 4.12 of the General Conditions.
13-294 3603 11-03 01300 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. The General Contractor shall provide the following temporary facilities: 1. Field Office: Contractor may provide a field office for his convenience. 2. Telephone: Telephone at the job site shall be in operation from the commencement of operations at the site until the acceptance of the building. Submit the number to the Architect within 15 days after the date of the Notice to Proceed. 3. Sanitary Facilities: Provide suitable toilet facilities with tight, painted enclosures. Keep toilet swept clean and supplied with toilet paper. Comply with all requirements of health authorities. When Sanitary Facilities are no longer required, Contractor shall remove them. 4. Scaffolding: Provide all scaffolding necessary for this work, and conforming to all governing ordinances and regulations. 5. Storage Sheds: Cement, Lime and other materials subject to damage from exposure to the weather shall be stored in weather-tight sheds with tight elevated floors. 6. Temporary Heat: Should it become necessary to do any work in the building, such as plastering, cement work, painting, etc., at the times when the temperature is below forty degrees F., the Contractor shall provide temporary heat for such length of time as deemed necessary by the Architect. 7. Utilities: Provide and pay for all electricity and water required for the construction of this work.
14-294 3603 11-03 01400 - CLEANING UP
A. The Contractor shall, at all times, Keep the premises free from accumulations of waste material or rubbish caused by his employees or work, and at the completion of the work, he shall remove all of his rubbish from and about the building and all his tools, scaffolding and surplus materials and shall leave his work “broom clean” or its equivalent and ready for use unless more exactly specified. 1. All glass must be washed on both sides. 2. In case of dispute, the Owner may remove the rubbish and charge the cost to the several Contractors as the Architect shall determine to be just.
15-294 3603 11-03 01410 - TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
1.01 GENERAL A. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent Testing Laboratory to perform specified services and testing. 1. Employment of laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to perform Work of Contract. 2. The designated laboratory indicated in Paragraph 1.06 B is to be utilized for pier construction observation. The designated laboratory shall function as an independent laboratory as specified herein. B. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere: 1. Inspections and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders or approvals of public authorities: Conditions of the Contract. 2. Individual specifications sections reference herein. C. Where terms "Inspector" and "Testing Laboratory" are used, they mean and refer respectively to an officially designated and accredited inspector of testing laboratory.
1.02 QUALIFICATION OF LABORATORY A. Meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification", published by American Council of Independent Laboratories. B. Meet basic requirements of ASTM E329, "Standards of Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete and Steel as Used in Construction". C. Authorized to operate in State in which Project is located. D. Testing Equipment: 1. Calibrated as reasonable intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either: a. National Bureau of Standards. b. Accepted values of natural physical constants.
1.03 LABORATORY DUTIES A. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor; provide qualified personnel after due notice. B. Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction: 1. Comply with specified standards. 2. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies of work or products.
16-294 3603 11-03 D. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection; one copy each to Architect, Structural Engineer, Owner, Contractor, and one copy to Record Documents File. Each report shall include: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number. 4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Record of temperature and weather conditions. 7. Date of test 8. Identification of product and specification section. 9. Location of sample or test in Project. 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Results of tests and compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. 12. Interpretation of test results, when requested by Architect. E. Perform additional tests as required by Architect.
1.04 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY A. Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirement of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of work. 3. Perform any duties of Contractor.
1.05 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel; provide access to Work, and to Manufacturer's Operations. B. Secure and deliver to laboratory adequate quantities of representative samples of materials proposed to be used, and which require testing. C. Furnish copies of products test reports as required. D. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to Work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at site or at source of the product to be tested. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For storage and curing of test samples. E. Notify laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. 1. Items indicated to be inspected or tested shall not be constructed until a laboratory representative is present at the site.
17-294 3603 11-03 2. Make arrangements with laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's convenience. 3. 1.06 SPECIFIC TESTS, INSPECTIONS AND METHODS REQUIRED A. Testing of Earthwork (Section 02220): 1. Select Fill: Perform tests on proposed select fill material prior to use to determine compliance with specified requirements. 2. Establish moisture density relationship for soil type. 3. Sub-Grade Density testing: a. Establish moisture-density relationship for soil type. b. Perform field in-place density relationship as follows: (1) Building subgrade: One test for each 2500 sq. ft. or fraction thereof, per lift. 4. Testing of Select Fill in place: a. Perform field in-place density test. (1) Six (6) tests per lift. B. Testing of Proper Bearing, Stratum, and Observation of Pier Drilling (Section 02362): 1. The General Contractor shall pay the fee for the services of the designated independent testing lab to perform the following: a. Determine the proper bearing elevation for all piers, based on the soil investigation data. b. Observe all pier drilling operations on a full time basis. c. Record and report all observations and pier depths to Owner/Architect and Structural Engineer. C. Control and Testing of Concrete: 1. Mix Design, Trial Mixes and Advance Tests: a. Design concrete mixes for each type concrete specified in accordance with ACI 318. b. For each concrete mix type required, make 2 trial mixes using aggregate proposed. c. Make advance tests of trial mixes with proposed materials. Test four cylinders in accordance with ASTM C-39 (2 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). Do not place concrete on project until laboratory reports and breaks on confirmation cylinders indicate that proposed mixes will develop required strength. d. Check mix designs and revise if necessary wherever changes are made in aggregates or in surface water
18-294 3603 11-03 content of aggregate or workability or concrete. Slump shall be minimal to produce workable mix. Laboratory will prescribe maximum quantity of water. 2. Test Cylinders: During progress of Work, make test cylinders for each different mix placed in any one day. For every concrete placement of 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof over 10 cubic yards, make three compression test cylinders of samples taken during pour. Test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C-39 (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). Make additional sets of cylinders for concrete placements from 100 yards to 200 yards and third set for pours exceeding 200 yards. 3. Slump Tests: Make slump tests on each load of concrete placed on this project. Laboratory shall immediately inform Contractor when slump exceeds limits specified.
19-294 3603 11-03
01500 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Final Inspection 1. The Contractor determines when work is complete. 2. The Contractor gives written notice that work is ready for final inspection. 3. A final inspection date and time will be set by the Architect and Owner. 4. At the time of final inspection, Contractor shall submit application for Final Payment, Affidavit of Release of Liens, and Guarantee and Warranties Information. 5. Architect and Owner shall make a final and complete Punch List. 6. The final certificate for final payment will not be processed to the Owner until all work is completed and acceptable.
B. Final Acceptance 1. The Contractor determines when Punch List work is complete. 2. The Contractor gives written notice that the Punch List Work is complete. 3. A final acceptance date and time will be set by Architect and Owner. The Architect and Owner with the Contractor shall inspect Punch List items to insure all work has been completed. 4. If work has been completed, the Architect shall process the Final Certificate of Payment to the Owner. 5. If work has not been completed, the Architect shall make additional inspections as required until work is complete. The General Contractor will be billed for the Architect’s travel expenses for the additional inspections until all work is complete and acceptable.
20-294 3603 11-03 01700 - GUARANTEES, MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONS MANUALS REQUIREMENTS
GUARANTEE FORMS - The Guarantees must be submitted on the forms furnished by Architect and must be filled out completely and correctly. Insert all guarantee forms in order and in one section only, of each Manual.
The Contractor shall provide completed guarantee forms for and not limited to the following listed elements of the project:
General Contractor 1 year Soil Poisoning 5 years Asphalt paving 2 years Roofing 2 years Stonework 1 year Painting 1 year Floor covering 1 year Air Conditioning and Heating 1 year Manufacturer’s Compressor and Motor Parts Compressor Refrigeration Cycle 5 years Plumbing 1 year Electrical 1 year Guarantees, and/or Warranties for All Manufactured Items 1 year minimum
NOTE: The date for commencement of all guarantees is the date of the final inspection.
21-294 3603 11-03 01800 - BARRICADES, SIGNS AND TRAFFIC HANDLING
1800.1. Description. This Item shall govern for providing, installing, moving, replacing, maintaining, cleaning and removing upon completion of work, all barricades, signs, cones, lights and other such type devices and of handling traffic as indicated on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
For this project, the traffic control plan consists of barricade and construction sheets BC-1 through BC-12 and traffic control plan sheet TCP-1. When working on or near a public roadway shoulder, Contractor shall place barricades, signs and other devices as required by sheet TCP-1. Contractor shall not close any travel lanes on any roadway without prior authorization from the Engineer.
1800.2. Construction Methods. All barricades, signs and other types of devices listed above shall conform to the requirements of the plans, the Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (TMUTCD) and the Compliant Work Zone Traffic Control Devices (CWZTCD) list. In cases of disagreement between these documents, the CWZTCD list shall govern over plans, and the TMUTCD shall govern over both the CWZTCD list and plans.
For this project a Traffic Control Plan (TCP), responsive to the TMUTCD, has been established by the Engineer. The Contractor may propose his own TCP. Contractor-proposed major modifications to the Traffic Control Plan shall bear the seal of a Registered Professional Engineer. If his plan is approved in writing by the Engineer, it may be used. Prior to beginning work, the Contractor shall designate, in writing, a competent person who will be responsible and available on the project site or in the immediate area to insure compliance with the TCP. The Engineer will designate a qualified Departmental person to observe implementation and who will have authority to assure compliance with the TCP.
All retroreflective traffic control devices such as barricades, vertical panels, signs, etc., shall be maintained by cleaning, replacing or a combination thereof such that during darkness and rain the retroreflective characteristics shall equal or exceed the retroreflective characteristics of the standard reflective panels in the Engineer's possession.
All work zones shall use fluorescent prismatic reflective sheeting, meeting the requirements of Departmental Material Specification DMS-8300 Type E, for all signs and traffic control devices that have an orange background and a black non-reflective legend. All signs with a white background and black non-reflective legend shall be manufactured using High Specific Intensity sheeting meeting the requirements of DMS-8300 Type C. Orange and white sheeting used on channelizing devices shall be manufactured using High Specific Intensity sheeting meeting the requirements of DMS-8300 Type C.
Refer to the plans and standard plan sheets for additional details.
1800.3. Measurement and Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item will not be measured nor paid for directly, but shall be considered subsidiary to the various bid items in the contract.
22-294 3603 11-03 01900 – STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION AND EROSION CONTROL
1900.1. Description. This Item shall govern for providing, installing, moving, replacing, maintaining, cleaning and removing upon completion of work, all erosion control devices as indicated on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
Contractor shall implement the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SW3P) and erosion control plan as shown on plan sheets ENV-1 through ENV-5. Contractor shall comply with all other provisions as stated in the contract, as well as all applicable codes, laws and regulations. 1900.1. Materials. Seeding: Section 2800 – Landscaping. Rock Filter Dams: TXDOT Item 5005 “Rock Filter Dams for Erosion and Sedimentation Control.” Construction Exits: TXDOT Item 5010, “Construction Exits.” Earthwork for Erosion Control: TXDOT Item 5012, “Earthwork for Erosion Control.” Temporary Sediment Control Fence: TXDOT Item 5249, “Temporary Sediment Control Fence.”
1900.2. Measurement and Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item will not be measured nor paid for directly, but shall be considered subsidiary to the various bid items in the contract.
23-294 3603 11-03 DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK
02100 - CLEARING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Removal and disposal of all obstructions from the site, such as, but not limited to buildings, concrete drives, storm cellar, concrete slabs on grade, abandoned utility pipes or conduits, curbs and gutters, etc. B. Install all barricades, fences, planking, bridges, bracing, shoring, lights, warning signs, guards, etc., as required for the protection of the public, street, sidewalks, adjoining property and workmen. C. Pumping, bailing and draining of all surface or seepage water form the site. D. Removal of trees.
1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 02210 - Site Grading. B. Section 02215 - Excavation.
1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to City codes for disposal of debris. B. The Contractor shall be required to notify utility companies and the city water department when working in areas where utility lines might be encountered. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage done to utility and water lines as a result of work done under this contract.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CLEARING A. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of Work. B. Remove trees and shrubs within marked areas. Grub out stumps and roots. C. Clear undergrowth and deadwood, without disturbing subsoil. D. Remove tree stumps and roots to ensure that the tree is dead and will not affect the foundations in the future.
3.02 PROTECTION A. Protect plant growth and features remaining as final landscaping. Protect benchmarks and existing work from damage or displacement. C. Maintain designated site access for vehicle and pedestrian traffic. D. Coordinate tree removal with the electrical service company to avoid damage to existing service lines.
3.03 REMOVAL
24-294 3603 11-03 A. Clean up all debris caused by the work of this Section, keeping the premises, streets, and adjacent property clean and neat at all time. After all work has been completed, patch any street and/or curb damaged by the work of this Contract in conformity with City requirements.
25-294 3603 11-03 02210 - SITE GRADING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Remove topsoil as required for performance of the Work. B. Excavate topsoil and subsoil from building, mechanical equipment enclosure, paving, and adjacent walk areas; stock pile and use as non-select backfill; remove excess from site. C. Grade and rough contour site.
1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 00220 - Soil Investigation Data: Not part of this Project. B. Section 01050 - Field Engineering: Establishing lines and levels. C. Section 02215 – Excavation: Excavation related to concrete work. D. Section 02220 - Backfilling: Backfilling beneath concrete slabs.
1.03 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit documents in accordance with Section 01720. B. Accurately record location of utilities remaining, rerouted utilities, new utilities by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts, and slope gradients.
1.04 PROTECTION A. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns, and other features remaining as portion of final landscaping. B. Protect benchmarks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, and paving and curbs. C. Protect above or below grade utilities which are to remain. D. Repair damage caused by construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. Coordinate with Section 01050. B. Identify known below grade utilities. Stake and flag locations. C. Identify and flag above grade utilities. D. Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining which pass through work area. E. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities. F. Upon discovery of unknown utility or concealed conditions, discontinue affected work; notify Architect/Engineer.
3.02 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or regraded and remove excess topsoil not being reused from site. B. Do not excavate wet topsoil.
26-294 3603 11-03
3.03 SUBSOIL EXCAVATION A. Excavate subsoil to grades shown on drawings as required for foundation construction, and remove excess subsoil not being reused from site. B. Do not excavate wet subsoil.
3.04 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus one inch.
27-294 3603 11-03 02215 - EXCAVATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Building excavation. B. Shoring excavation.
1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services. B. Section 02210 - Site Grading: Topsoil removal from site surface and re-use as common fill. C. Section 02220 - Backfilling.
1.03 PROTECTION A. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns, and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping. B. Protect benchmarks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving and curbs from equipment and vehicular traffic. C. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain. D. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning, or other materials required to prevent cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavation. E. Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected work in area until notified to resume work. F. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundations from frost. G. Grade excavation top perimeter to prevent surface water run-off into excavation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. Coordinate with Section 01050. B. Identify known underground utilities. Stake and flag locations. C. Identify and flag surface and aerial utilities. D. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities. E. Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining which pass through work area.
3.02 EXCAVATION A. Excavate subsoil required for building foundation, construction operations, and other work. B. Hand trim excavation and leave free of loose matter. C. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock. D. Correct unauthorized excavation at no cost to Owner.
28-294 3603 11-03 E. Fill over-excavated areas under structure bearing surfaces in accordance with direction by Architect/Engineer.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide for visual inspection of bearing surfaces.
29-294 3603 11-03 02220 - BACKFILLING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Building perimeter backfilling to subgrade elevations. B. Site backfilling. C. Fill under building foundations, floor slab, dock, equipment and adjacent walk areas. D. Compaction requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services: Compaction requirements of backfill. B. Section 02215 - Excavation. 1.03 TESTS A. Tests and analysis of subgrade and fill materials will be performed in accordance with ASTM D1557 and with Section 01410.
1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM C136 - Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. B. ASTM D1557 - Tests for Moisture - Density Relationship of Soils using 10 lb. (4.5 kg) Rammer in eighteen inch (18”) (457 mm) Drop. C. Texas SDHPT, Latest Edition, Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges, referred to in text as SDHPT. D. American Association of State Highways and Transportation Officials, referred to as AASHTO. 1.05 SAMPLES A. Submit Samples in accordance with Section 01410. B. Submit sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory, in air-tight containers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Select Fill or Engineered Fill: Crushed stone conforming to THD Item 247. Type A, Grade 1, with LL of 30 max. Compact to 95% optimum density (ASTM D1557) at or near the optimum moisture content. Do not deviate from optimum moisture content more than 3.0% above or 1.5% below optimum. B. Non-Select Fill, or Common Fill: On-site excavated materials free of rocks, roots, debris, waste, frozen material, vegetable and other deleterious matter. C. New Top Soil: Natural, fertile, friable soil, sand loam, representative of local productive soil and 90 percent free of clay lumps, subsoil or other foreign matter larger than two inch (2”) diameter; not frozen or muddy, and free of grass, weeds, grass roots and seeds. Acidity range pH 5-7, not less than three percent organic matter as determined by loss on ignition of moisture free samples dried at 100 degrees Centigrade; not more than fifteen (15) percent by volume passing the No. 4 sieve and 60 percent by volume passing the No. 200 sieve; clay content between 5 and 25 percent of material passing the No. 4 sieve.
30-294 3603 11-03 D. Existing Topsoil: Existing topsoil may be used in cases in which the existing topsoil meets the specifications for New Topsoil and which occurs in sufficient quantities to meet specified depths. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify areas to be backfilled are free of debris, snow, ice, or water, and ground surfaces are not frozen. Establish and maintain elevations. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Compact subgrade surfaces to density requirements for backfill material. B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not readily capable of being compacted. Backfill with select fill and compact to density. C. C. Protect all utilities.
3.03 BACKFILLING A. Backfill areas to contours and elevations. Use unfrozen materials. B. Backfill systematically, as early as possible, to allow maximum time for natural settlement. C. Place and compact select fill materials in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches loose depth. D. Employ a placement method so as not to disturb or damage utilities in trenches. E. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density. F. Slope grade away from building minimum two (2) inches in ten (10) feet, unless noted otherwise. G. Make changes in grade gradual. Blend slopes into level areas. H. Remove surplus backfill materials from site. I. Leave stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials. J. Select fill occurs beneath building slabs, sitework concrete, and raised concrete foundations, concrete walks, and mechanical equipment area slabs. Select fill shall not be less than three feet six inches (3’-6”) compacted thickness. K. Non-select Fill or Common Fill shall be utilized to bring fill areas to finish subgrade level beneath building and subgrade below specified top soil. Compact common fill to 95% maximum density at optimum moisture according to ASTM D698. L. Place topsoil in six (6) inch minimum thickness where indicated on Site Plan or disturbed by construction. Compact to 90% maximum density at optimum moisture according to ASTM D698 and finish grade to elevations indicated.
31-294 3603 11-03 02250 - SOIL POISONING
02250:01 - SOIL POISONING GUARANTEE: Upon completion of soil treatment, and as a condition of final acceptance, the Owner shall be furnished with a written guarantee which shall provide that: A. Application complies with this Specification. B. The effectiveness of the treatment is guaranteed for not less than five (5) years. The beginning date of the policy shall be that of the Architect’s “Certificate of Substantial Completion.” C. The Contractor shall re-inspect annually during the 5 year period and future applications toxicants, found necessary to continue protection, shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. D. The Contractor agrees that in the event of subterranean termite damage to either the structure or contents, repairs shall be performed with the approval and at the expense of the Contractor. E. Further, the Contractor agrees to extend this Contract annually for the lifetime of the property for an additional premium. The Guarantee shall be drawn in favor of the Owner.
02250:02 - MATERIALS A. Soil poisoning Materials: Equal to Dursban TC as manufactured by the Dow Chemical Company. Material used must be approved for use by the State of Texas.
02250:03 - INSTALLATION A. Location: 1. Treat under all new interior and exterior concrete slabs. 2. Treat under all new interior and exterior grade beams. 3. Treat under new porches. B. Application: 1. Shall be made at least two (2) hours prior placement of membrane waterproofing and shall be performed during regular working hours in order to be subject to inspection. Application shall not begin until all preparations for slab placement have been complete. 2. Soil poisons shall not be applied when soil is excessively wet. Apply according to manufacturer recommendations. 3. In the event of rain, re-treat. 4. Contractor shall comply with all Texas Structural Pest Control Board Requirements, Including the S.P.C.B. requirement that the S.P.C.B. be called or faxed the SEC 599.3 Form from 4 to 24 hours before the treatment by the pest control company.
32-294 3603 11-03 02362 - DRILLED PIER FOUNDATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Bored end bearing cast-in-place concrete piers with reinforcing steel.
1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 00220 - Soil Investigation Data: Soil report. B. Section 01151 - Unit Prices. C. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services. Contractor shall employ the services of the lab performing the original soil investigation and foundation recommendations to supervise the drilling and construction of all pier foundations. D. Section 02220 - Excavation: Excavation to specified level and/or designated bearing elevation. E. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcing: Specifications for reinforcing. F. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Specifications for concrete.
1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit three (3) copies of project records and drawings in accordance with Section 01720. B. Accurately record pier locations as established on the drawings, using grid lines and references. Record pier diameter, size, bearing elevations, penetration depth and condition of bottom of excavation. Record the size, number and length of rebar placed. Plumb within tolerance. Size and depth of casing used if necessary.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete Materials and Mix: Specified in Section 03300 using Type I cement, 1-1/2" max. aggregate size, 3000 psi 28 day strength, five inch (5") inch maximum slump. B. Reinforcement: Specified in Section 03200. C. Steel Casing: Of sufficient strength, diameter, length and construction to meet construction requirements as to safety and prevention of caving of soil and water penetration.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.02 INSTALLATION A. Drill concentric pier shafts. B. Clean pier bearing surface utilizing drilling equipment to expose a bearing surface free of loose material. Provide for the protection of workmen when in excavation according to OSHA requirements. Pier bearing shall be free of standing water, foreign matter, or loose material. C. Allow inspection of pier shafts prior to reinforcing steel and concrete placement. Prevent foreign matter from falling into pier hole.
33-294 3603 11-03 D. Place reinforcing steel in accordance with Section 03200. E. Place concrete within four (4) hours after pier hole is cleaned and in accordance with Section 03300. Use equipment designed for vertical placement of concrete. Vibrate concrete full depth of pier. F. Provide dowels for connection plinth and grade beams. G. Place concrete through a temporary casing if an inflow of subsurface water occurs. Place concrete to height sufficient to effect seal.
3.03 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. Perform concrete testing in accordance with Section 01410. Special attention shall be given to the requirement for full time inspection paid by the General Contractor. B. Provide testing laboratory personnel to establish bearing conditions, pier construction procedures and to observe the construction of all piers in accordance with Section 01410 and Section 03300.
3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum: 1" in 10' from vertical for plumb piers. B. Top: Maximum 2 inches from location indicated.
3.05 PRECAUTIONS A. Employ drilling contractors who have adequate equipment to perform the required work. B. Make certain the drilling contractor is aware of the project requirements, unit prices, and the need to properly staff the work to meet the construction schedule. C. Make certain the drilling contractor is aware of all active underground utility lines. D. Where overhead power lines exist, observe proper clearances required by utility company.
34-294 3603 11-03 02513 - ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. New Pavement: 1. Prepare subgrade, work and compact to receive base course. 2. Prepare base course, work and compact to receive hot mix. 3. Prime existing course, place asphalt pavement.
1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 02577 - Pavement Markings.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D1557 - Test for Moisture - Density Relationship of Soils using 10 lb. (4.5 kg) Rammer in 18 inch (457mm) Drop. B. Texas Department of Highways and Public Transportation: "1993 Standard Specifications for the Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges,” with the exception of measurement and payment (referred to in following text as TXDOT).
1.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Testing and inspection of asphalt pavement mix(es) and testing of placed stabilizing base course and asphalt pavement will be performed by independent testing laboratory paid by the Contractor and approved by the Architect in accordance with Section 01410. B. Allow testing laboratory access to the mixing plant for verification of weights or proportions, character of materials used and determination of temperatures used in the preparation of asphalt concrete mix. C. The testing laboratory shall perform laboratory tests on proposed asphalt pavement mix to determine conformity with requirements. D. The testing laboratory shall perform compaction tests on the subgrade; base and asphalt pavement for each 9,000 square feet of area. E. When the subgrade and base course or portion thereof has been placed and compacted in accordance with requirements, notify the testing laboratory to perform density tests. Do not place asphalt pavement until results have been verified and base course installation approved. F. If compaction tests indicate that subgrade base course or asphalt paving do not meet specified requirements, remove defective work, replace and retest at own expense.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BASE COURSE MATERIALS A. Base: TXDOT Item 247 “Flexible Base,” Type A, Grade 2, crushed limestone (including special provision 247---017). Also reference TXDOT Item 204, “Sprinkling.”
35-294 3603 11-03 B. Primer: Homogeneous medium curing liquid asphalt, of type recommended for asphalt paving; of grade to suit job conditions. Cut-back asphalt Type MC-30 or as approved.
2.02 ASPHALT PAVEMENT MATERIALS A. TXDOT Item 340, hot mix asphalt concrete pavement, Class A, Type D, fine graded surface course (including special provision 340---007). Also reference TXDOT Items 213, “Rolling (Pneumatic Tire), (including special provision 213--- 001)” 217, “Rolling (Vibratory),” 300, “Asphalts, Oils and Emulsions (including special provision 300---081),” 301, “Asphalt Antistripping Agents (including special provision 301---002),” 520, “Weighing and Measuring Equipment (including special provision 520---001),” and 5880 “Ride Quality for Pavement Surfaces.” B. Aggregate shall be crushed stone.
2.03 ASPHALT PAVEMENT MIX A. Mix shall be in accordance with TXDOT Item 340 (including special provision 340---007). Also reference TXDOT Items 213, “Rolling (Pneumatic Tire), (including special provision 213---001)” 217, “Rolling (Vibratory),” 300, “Asphalts, Oils and Emulsions (including special provision 300---081),” 301, “Asphalt Antistripping Agents (including special provision 301---002),” 520, “Weighing and Measuring Equipment (including special provision 520---001),” and 5880 “Ride Quality for Pavement Surfaces.”
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION A. Asphalt Pavement: 1. Scarify subgrade where asphalt pavement is to be placed, to a depth of minimum 6 inches, and compact to 95% (ASTM D 1557) maximum density at optimum moisture. 2. Water and thoroughly mix subgrade materials until optimum moisture content is obtained when deficiency of moisture content exists. When excess of moisture exists, rework and aerate subgrade until optimum moisture content is obtained. 3. Before final rolling, shape entire section and additional base as required and compact subgrade to provide grades, elevation and cross-section indicated. Points of finished subgrade surface shall be within 1/2 inch of elevations indicated.
3.02 PLACEMENT OF BASE COURSE A. Base Course Compacted Thickness: 1. All Asphalt Areas: Six and one-half inches (6-1/2") thick minimum, or as required to extend base course from bottom of asphalt pavement to top of prepared subgrade. B. Spread base course materials over prepared subgrade to thickness specified above. Compact to 95% maximum density at optimum moisture according to ASTM D
36-294 3603 11-03 1557. Ensure top surface of base course is true to lines and grades indicated, with all points within 1/2 inch of elevations indicated. C. Add water during compaction to bring base course materials to optimum moisture content. When an excess moisture exists, rework base course materials until optimum moisture content is obtained.
3.03 PRIMING PREPARED BASE COURSE A. Ensure base course is dry and free of loose and foreign material before priming. B. Apply primer over prepared base course at a uniform rate of 1/5 gallon per square yard. Ensure primer is at temperature recommended by manufacturer. Use clean natural sand to blot excess primer. C. Similarly prime surfaces of curbs, gutters and approach slabs which will be in contact with asphalt pavement.
3.04 PLACEMENT OF ASPHALT PAVEMENT A. Place asphalt pavement within 24 hours of priming base course. B. Asphalt Compacted Thickness: All asphalt paved areas 2 and one-half inches (2- 1/2") minimum thickness. C. Do not place asphalt pavement when surface temperature is 50 degrees F. or lower and falling. Ensure asphalt pavement is minimum 245 degrees F. immediately after placing and prior to initial rolling. D. Compact asphalt paving course to required density, with approved rolling equipment. Start compaction as soon as pavement will bear equipment without cracking or undue displacement. E. Carry out compaction in three operations in pass sequence. Ensure each pass of roller overlaps previous passes to ensure smooth surface free of roller marks. Keep roller wheels sufficiently moist so as not to pick up material. F. Perform hand tamping in areas not accessible to rolling equipment. G. Ensure joints made during paving operations are straight, clean, vertical and free of broken or loose materials. Prime vertical surfaces of joints to ensure tight bond. H. Ensure surface of completed asphalt pavement is true to lines, profiles and elevations indicated, and is free from depressions exceeding 1/4 inch when measured with a 10 ft. straight edge. Surface shall be uniform in appearance with aggregate fixed firmly in place. I. Do not allow vehicular traffic on newly paved areas until surface has cooled to atmospheric temperature.
37-294 3603 11-03 02666 - REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS
2666.1. Description. This Item shall govern for furnishing and placing reflectorized pavement markings of the types, colors, shapes, sizes, widths, and thickness shown on the plans. Where no width of marking is indicated, width shall be 4 inches.
2666.2. Materials.
(1) Type II Marking Materials. Type II markings are paint-type materials that are applied at ambient or slightly elevated temperatures. Type II marking materials shall conform to TxDOT Departmental Materials Specifications D-9-8200, YPT-10 and/or WPT-10 and D-9-8290.
(2) Source of Supply. All Type II marking materials and glass traffic beads shall be purchased on the open market.
2666.3. Equipment Requirements. Equipment used to place pavement markings shall:
(1) Be maintained in satisfactory operating condition.
(2) Be capable of placing lines with clean edges and of uniform cross-section. All lines shall have a tolerance of plus or minus 1/8 inch per four (4) inch width.
(3) Have an automatic cut-off device with manual operating capabilities to provide clean, reasonably square marking ends to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
(4) Provide continuous mixing and agitation of the pavement marking material. The use of pans, aprons or similar appliances which the die overruns will not be permitted for longitudinal striping applications.
(5) Apply beads by an automatic bead dispenser attached to the pavement marking equipment in such a manner that the beads are dispensed uniformly and almost instantly upon the marking as the marking is being applied to the road surface. The bead dispenser shall have an automatic cut-off control, synchronized with the cut-off of the pavement marking equipment.
2666.4. Construction Methods.
(1) General. When required by the Engineer, the Contractor and the Engineer shall review the sequence of work to be followed and the estimated progress schedule.
Markings shall be placed on pavements free of traffic.
Guides to mark the lateral location of pavement markings shall be established as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall establish the pavement marking guides and the Engineer will verify the location of the guides.
Markings shall be placed in proper alignment with the guides.
38-294 3603 11-03 Markings shall essentially have a uniform cross-section. The density and quality of markings shall be uniform throughout their thickness. The applied markings shall have no more than five (5) percent, by area, of holes or voids and shall be free of blisters.
Markings, in place on the roadway, shall be reflectorized both internally and externally. Glass beads shall be applied to the materials at a uniform rate sufficient to achieve uniform and distinctive retroreflective characteristics when observed in accordance with Test Method Tex- 828-B.
The Contractor's personnel shall be sufficiently skilled in the work of installing pavement markings.
Markings placed that are not in alignment or sequence, as shown on the plans or as stated in this specification, shall be removed by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Removal shall be in as directed by the Engineer. Guides placed on the roadway for alignment purposes shall not establish a permanent marking on the roadway.
Unless otherwise shown on the plans, pavement markings may be applied by any method that will yield markings meeting the requirements of this specification.
(2) Surface Preparation. New portland-cement-concrete surfaces shall be cleaned to remove curing membrane, dirt, grease, loose and/or flaking existing construction markings and other forms of contamination.
Pavement to which material is to be applied shall be completely dry. Pavements shall be considered dry if, on a sunny day after observation for 15 minutes, no condensation occurs on the underside of a one (1) foot square piece of clear plastic that has been placed on the pavement and weighted on the edges.
(3) Application of Type II Markings. The application of Type II marking materials shall be done only on surfaces with a minimum surface temperature of 50 F.
The application rate for Type II marking material shall be: between 15 and 20 gallons per mile of solid four (4) inch line and between 30 and 40 gallons per mile for solid eight (8) inch line.
When, in the case of impending inclement weather, and the Engineer directs the Contractor to apply water-based traffic paint, the markings are damaged by subsequent rain, sleet, hail, etc., the Contractor will be paid for the initial placement and the replacement markings. However, if the Contractor places the markings at his option, the Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with the replacement markings.
2666.5. Measurement and Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item will not be measured nor paid for directly, but shall be considered subsidiary to the various bid items in the contract.
39-294 3603 11-03 02613 - CONCRETE BRICK PAVING
02613: 01 - SCOPE A. Work Included: 1. Furnish all labor, materials, and incidentals necessary to make this section complete. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Site Grading - Section 02210 2. Cast in Place Concrete - Section 03300
02613:02 - QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturers: 1. PaveStone - www.pavestone.com 2. Belgard - www.belgardhardscapes.com 3. Approved Equal.
02613:03 - MATERIALS A. Concrete Brick Pavers: 1. Shall be equal to “Parkway” Concrete Paving Brick, 4" x 8" x 2 3/8" as manufactured by PaveStone. 2. Colors selected by Architect from Manufacturers Standard Colors.
02613:04 - INSTALLATION A. Install as recommended by manufacturer and as indicated on the Drawings. B. Install in a mortarless system, in a basket weave pattern.
40-294 3603 11-03 02750 – IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02750.170
170.1. Description. This Item shall govern for constructing an irrigation system as shown on the plans and as approved by the Engineer.
170.2. General.
License Requirements. The Contractor shall be required to possess an irrigator's license issued by the Texas Board of Irrigators or employ such a licensed irrigator to construct the irrigation system. The Engineer may require documentation of such license for his records. The irrigation system shall be installed and maintained under the supervision of the licensed irrigator who must be on the site at all times during this work or at such times as required by the Engineer.
170.3. Materials. Materials shall conform to the requirements shown on the plans and to the following requirements.
(1) Irrigation Pipe. Irrigation pipe shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conforming to ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 or ASTM D 2241, SDR 13.5 or SDR 17 or SDR 21, as shown on the plans.
(2) Fittings. Fittings, not including valves or sprinkler heads, shall conform to ASTM D 2466.
(3) Encasement Pipe. Unless otherwise shown on the plans and specifications, encasement pipe shall be PVC conforming to ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
(4) Bentonite Slurry. The slurry shall be a viscous mixture of a commercial bentonite and fresh water. The slurry shall contain two (2) to eight (8) percent of the bentonite additive by weight.
(5) Miscellaneous Accessories. Accessory material, such as valves, sprinkler heads or backflow preventers shall meet the requirements shown on the plans.
170.4. Equipment.
(1) General. The machinery, tools, and equipment necessary for proper prosecution of the work shall be on the project and approved by the Engineer prior to beginning the work.
All machinery, tools, and equipment used shall be maintained in a satisfactory working condition.
(2) Boring and Water Jetting Equipment. A boring machine or jetting equipment shall be capable of boring or jetting the lengths shown on plans in one direction only. The equipment shall be capable of maintaining horizontal and vertical alignment to an accuracy of one (1) inch in 10 feet.
41-294 3603 11-03 170.5. Construction Methods.
(1) Site Preparation. The limits of work shall include the area(s) shown on the plans. All operations shall be confined to these areas and such other areas of the right-of-way that may be required to gain access to the site(s) shown on the plans. The contractor shall vary access routes across the right-of-way as far as possible, to prevent any damage to slopes and existing vegetation. The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair and replacement of slopes and vegetation damaged by construction operations.
(2) Site Amenities and Protection. During the execution of the work, utmost care shall be exercised to prevent damage to any utilities, structures, right-of-way or other site amenities.
The Contractor shall not repair or service any equipment or perform any operations on the right-of-way which will in any way mar the landscape by rendering the soil sterile, damage existing vegetation or which may have an adverse effect on the proposed use of the land. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the work site in a neat appearance and safe condition at all times.
(3) Excavation and Trenching. Excavation and trenching shall be performed in accordance with the plans and specifications. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, trenches shall be of sufficient depth to provide for a minimum of 18 inches of cover for all lines. Common trenches for irrigation lines shall be utilized wherever feasible.
(4) Boring. All boring shall be performed at the locations shown on the plans or as approved by the Engineer.
(5) Trench Protection. Where pipe is required to be installed under roadways or other facilities by boring, construction shall be performed in such a manner that it will not weaken or damage the roadway or other facilities. The use of water or other fluids in connection with the boring operation will be permitted only to the extent to lubricate cuttings; jetting will not be permitted.
In unconsolidated soil formations, a bentonite slurry may be used to consolidate cuttings of the bit, seal the walls of the hole and furnish lubrication for subsequent removal of cuttings and installation of the pipe immediately thereafter.
(6) Water Jetting. Water jetting will be allowed only when shown on the plans or approved in writing by the Engineer.
When jetting operations fail to produce a smooth stable hole, operations shall cease and all necessary work will be completed by boring.
All damage caused by improper or incorrect jetting shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense.
(7) Encasement. The lines shall be encased at locations as shown on the plans. The inside diameter of the casing pipe shall be not less than one (1) inch nor more than three (3) inches larger than the outside diameter of the irrigation line. A minimum of 24 inches of cover shall be provided
42-294 3603 11-03 for encasement pipe under paved areas and a minimum of 18 inches of cover for encasement pipe placed under sidewalks, non-loadbearing slabs, or other unpaved areas unless specified otherwise on the plans herein.
(8) Pipe and Valve Assembly. Pipe and fittings of the size shown on the plans shall be assembled as recommended by the manufacturer(s) and as approved by the Engineer. Pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust, dirt and moisture before assembly. Solvent shall be applied with a non-synthetic bristle brush. All connections between plastic pipe and metal valves shall be made with threaded fittings and plastic adapters.
Backflow assemblies shall be installed as shown on the plans or as required by ordinances of local public entities.
Control valves shall be installed in valve boxes as shown on the plans and shall be grouped together where practical. Valves and pipelines shall be installed no closer than 12 inches from sidewalk edges, buildings, and walls.
(9) Sprinkler Heads. Sprinkler heads shall be installed at locations shown on the plans and in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations.
(10) Closing of Pipe and Flushing of Lines. The lines shall be capped or plugged immediately after installation to prevent the entrance of materials which would obstruct the pipe. The caps or plugs shall be left in place until removal is necessary for the completion of the installation. All water lines shall be thoroughly flushed before installing heads or valves.
(11) Hydrostatic Tests. The Contractor shall request the presence of the Engineer in writing at least 48 hours in advance of testing. All preliminary testing shall be accomplished in the presence of the Engineer. All piping to be tested shall be center loaded with small amounts of backfill to prevent arching or slipping while under pressure. A continuous and static water pressure of 100 psi minimum shall be applied after all welded plastic joints have been allowed to cure at least 24 hours. With all valves closed, the preliminary testing for all main and lateral lines from the meter to the valves shall be performed for a minimum of two (2) consecutive hours. Any leaks which occur during the preliminary test period shall be repaired immediately following the test. The lines shall then be retested until approved by the Engineer. Before final approval, the lines shall remain under designated static pressure for a period of 48 hours without leaks for the final test. The Contractor shall supply the pressuring equipment and all other test equipment.
(12) Backfill and Compaction. After the irrigation system is fully operational and all required tests and inspections have been performed and approved, the excavations and trenches shall be backfilled with layers of clean soil, free of rubbish and large rocks, and as approved by the Engineer. Each layer shall not exceed eight (8) inches of loose depth and shall be compacted until uniform compaction is obtained as approved by the Engineer. All areas shall be smoothed and dressed to final grade and to the approval of the Engineer.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
Pre-construction conference: see section 2800.164.4.
43-294 3603 11-03
Irrigation system shall be complete and fully operational prior to plant material installations.
Licensed irrigator shall "free flow" irrigation source, verify and check volume and pressure to worst case station in design for confirmation of source capability to design. If source should not meet anticipated design parameters the contractor shall notify the engineer of this condition and shall consult and work with the engineer to resolve this condition through redesign of the irrigation system or improvement of source condition. In the event this notification is not performed, the contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revisions necessary. Revised drawings may be generated by the engineer in consultation with the contractor to resolve either condition. In the case of irrigation system redesign, the contractor shall not be entitled to any extra compensation as this work shall be considered incidental to the project.
Contractor shall not to cover any part of system until proper operation of worst case station has been field verified and inspected.
The drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be installed. Due to the scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and sleeves which may be required. The contractor shall carefully investigate the site conditions affecting all work and shall plan his work accordingly, furnishing such offsets, fittings and sleeves as may be required to meet site conditions. The use of piping in common trenches is encouraged whenever possible. The contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions or differences should be brought to the attention of the engineer who will review recommended changes proposed by the contractor. The engineer shall approve or disapprove proposed changes and in the latter situation the engineer/architect reserves the right to direct changes to his satisfaction. It is expected that some rerouting will be necessary around trees, utilities, etc., as part of this project. This work shall be considered incidental to the project. In the event this notification is not performed, the contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revisions necessary.
Contractor is directed to note the required installation taps and new 2” water meter on existing lines to local municipal water supply. Contractor shall coordinate, pay all fees, construct, and furnish all water meters, electrical meter loops, electrical meters, appurtenances, etc. to provide complete working irrigation system(s).
Materials-all materials shall be as specified or approved equals.
Controllers, valves, heads, sprays and bubblers shall be manufactured from the same company or as directed by the engineer.
1. Underground pipe. All underground pipe shall be domestic extruded pipe manufactured from PVC compound. All PVC pipe shall be SCH 40 in the sizes indicated on the plans. Pipe shall be pressure rated with slip type welded joints. A 4-foot per second velocity rule shall apply to any pipe not labeled on the plan.
2. Remote control valves.
44-294 3603 11-03 All station remote control valves shall have a brass or stainless steel flow control stem for flow regulation. All remote control valves shall be sized to match incoming pipe (2” valves) and/or as directed by the engineer if conditions warrant a size change. Contractor shall set up one station initially without covering pipe and check operation to verify source capability of operating system.
Remote control valves shall be: Rainbird 2” "PEB series", Toro P220 series or approved equal.
3. Valve boxes. All valves shall be mounted below grade in meter boxes by East Jordan iron works (800) 289- 4766 or approved equal.
Water meter box, faucet box and valve control box, by East Jordan iron works: Meter box msbcf1118-18 w/msp w/ductile iron cover mscbc-1118. Double check valve box, msbcf 1527-18 w/msp ductile iron cover mscbc-1527.
Or approved equals.
Manufacturer's extensions or stacking of boxes to comply with grades and details shall be required. One valve per box only will be permitted.
4. Irrigation heads. Bubblers shall be Rainbird #1408 series, series, Toro FB 200 series, (or approved equal) fixed rate bubblers with 2 gpm flow rate, on threaded riser/extensions as directed by the engineer. All bubblers shall be equipped with shrub adapters and standard filters. Install according to fixed bubbler detail.
Sprays (15’ maximum spacing) shall be Rainbird 1800 series 4” pop-ups with mpr/van nozzles, Toro 570z series 4” pop-ups with mpr/adjustable arc nozzles, (or approved equal).
Replacement heads: as part of this contract, twenty (20) replacement heads of each type of head, threaded riser/extension, bubbler and nozzle used shall be provided to owner for long term maintenance purposes or approved equals).
5. Miscellaneous fittings. The contractor shall furnish all other fittings and appurtenances necessary to complete the system and as detailed.
6. Control wire. All low voltage control wire shall be type UF 14 ga. minimum, color coded, and specifically manufactured for direct burial. All wire connections and splices shall be made with waterproof compression clamps covered with scotch fill or an approved equal. Control wire shall be enclosed in min. 1" grey PVC electrical conduit for all underground routing when under pavement of any type – contractor shall size conduit to accommodate wire in single conduit. One additional wire shall be run to each set of valves (manifold) for future use and diagnostic purposes. Licensed irrigator shall verify wire sizing to runs and recommend changes if necessary.
45-294 3603 11-03 7. Solvent cement. Solvent cement shall be the type recommended by the pipe manufacturer.
8. Controller(s). Controller(s) shall be Rainbird "esp-mc series", Toro “custom command series (40) station, of plastic boxed outdoor type mounted on manufacturer’s pedestal or approved equal.
Controller shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. Controllers shall be located outdoors as directed by the engineer. All external wiring not buried shall be enclosed in minimum 1.5+" galvanized steel conduit in compliance with item 618. Controller and accessories shall be as specified or approved equal. Controller locations shall be as shown on plan or as directed by the engineer.
9. Double check valve assembly. All connections to a potable water supply shall be protected by a 2” double check valve assembly watts 007M2QT or approved equal (DCVA) in size of mainline pipe. The type of (DCVA) in all cases shall meet the requirements and specifications of the individual water supply being accessed for the irrigation system.
10. Pipe encasement. All pipe sleeves shall be Schedule 80 PVC. Installation shall comply with item 618 requirements for PVC SCH 80 4” (size sleeves to accommodate system pipe and/or as shown on plan). Control wire shall be enclosed in a separate min. 1+" SCH. 40 PVC electrical pipe sleeve for all wire routing under pavement. Pipe encasement shall be required where irrigation system pipe is routed under any concrete paved surfaces, paved surfaces used by vehicles, or structures such as walls, etc.
11. Sleeve intersection boxes: shall be required where system (water and electric) make any turns located under pavement (except brick on sand paver areas). This will facilitate maintenance and repair. Sleeve intersection boxes shall be sized to accommodate six inches of space between any pipe and sidewall of box. Boxes shall be of the same metal materials (or approved equal) as valve boxes except sized as specified under this note subject to approval of the engineer.
Construction methods-
1. Excavation and backfilling. The contractor shall do all necessary excavating and backfilling required for the proper installation of the pipe and other equipment. Excavation depth and pipe location shall be in strict accordance with the dimensions and notes on the plans. Any deviations in the piping shown on the plans shall not be permitted without approval from the engineer. Minor adjustments to the layout that may be necessary to avoid unforeseen underground obstructions may be made by the contractor so long as they are recorded on the field drawings and incorporated into the "as-built" drawings described herein. Remaining excavated material displaced by pipe placement in trench shall not be left on ditch top but shall be spread on site. Yard trench mounds will not be accepted.
(a) Trench excavation.
46-294 3603 11-03 Trench excavation shall follow, as much as possible, the layout indicated on the drawing. Dig trenches straight and support pipe continuously on bottom of trench. Lay pipe to an even grade. Trench shall be clean and smooth with all organic debris and sharp objects removed. Pipe shall be snaked in trench, as much as possible, to allow for expansion and contraction. Solvent weld pipe shall not be installed when air temperature is below 40 degrees or dropping to 40 degrees Fahrenheit within 30 minutes of welding. Plastic pipe shall be cut with a hand saw in a manner that will insure a square cut. Burrs at cut ends shall be removed prior to installation so that a smooth unobstructed flow will be obtained. Plastic to plastic joints shall be made following manufacturer's recommendations. Tape closed any open pipe at end of workday.
(b) Depth of cover. Irrigation mainlines shall have a minimum of 18" of cover (40" to top of pipe sleeve under roadway surfaces) and all lateral lines shall have a minimum of 12" of cover to top of pipe.
(c) Backfill. All backfill material shall be free of sharp rock, stones greater than 1/2" diameter, or other materials that could damage pipe during the backfilling operations. In the event that rocky conditions exist sand shall be used as a cushion 2" above and below the pipe as directed by the engineer. Any material displaced by the use of a sand cushion shall be removed offsite in a legal manner and/or as directed by the engineer. Backfilling shall not be done in freezing weather except with written approval of the engineer. The work site shall be continuously cleared of excess material and/or waste materials as the backfilling progresses and shall be left in a workmanlike condition to the satisfaction of the engineer. Trenches shall be "watered-in" and settled as much as possible during backfilling operations. In order to prevent accidental injury, any open trenches shall be covered or clearly taped off and flagged to the engineer's satisfaction.
(d) Encasement pipe shall be used where system pipe is routed under roadway, any concrete paved surfaces, paved surfaces used by vehicles, or structures such as walls, etc. Boring shall be required for encasement pipe installation when installed under existing pavement surface or as noted on plan.
2. Installation of nozzles. All nozzles shall be installed in accordance with the details in the drawings. All nozzles shall be installed on the risers only after the system has been thoroughly flushed to remove all soil and trash that may have accumulated in the lines during the installation. Nozzles shall not be installed until flushing of lines is observed by the engineer during inspection process for each station. Contractor shall be responsible to set up time for flush test to be observed by the engineer.
3. Installation of valves. All valves shall be installed in accordance with the details in the drawings and in approved valve boxes which shall reach to at least 4" below the bottom of the valve. All remote control section valves shall be installed at a depth of 12-18" dependent on pipe size.
4. Installation of control wire. All low voltage control wire shall be laid in the pipe trenches below the pipe. All wire runs shall be continuous lengths. Expansion coils shall be required on runs longer than 100’ and at each turn or in curves (12” length minimum). No splices shall be made in the trench. Any wire
47-294 3603 11-03 splices that are required shall be made at the valves using waterproof materials specified herein. Splices shall not be permitted in line between valves and controller. Wire shall be placed in minimum 1+" diameter grey Schedule 40 PVC electrical conduit for all routing under pavement.
5. Installation of controller(s). Controller shall be installed in accordance with the drawings, the details and item 618. Location adjustment may be necessary to meet site conditions. Should relocation be necessary, the contractor shall contact the engineer immediately and the engineer will work with the contractor to establish the final location. Such relocation shall be considered an incidental change, with no additional compensation awarded. One electrical circuit shall be dedicated to each controller.
6. Installation of the double check valve(s). Double check valves shall be installed in accordance with the drawings and details. The location of the double check valve shall be as shown on the plans. Adjustment to the location may be necessary to meet unforeseen site conditions. Should relocation be necessary, the contractor shall contact the engineer and the engineer will work with the contractor to establish the final location. Such relocation shall be considered an incidental change, with no additional compensation awarded.
7. Installation of water meters. The contractor shall contact the governing authority for installation of water meter(s). Water meters shall be minimum of 2+" in size. Water meters shall be installed at locations indicated on plan. If there are any conflicts, contact engineer for consultation on alternate location.
8. Project supervision. The contractor shall continuously maintain a competent superintendent, licensed by the state of Texas as an irrigator and satisfactory to the engineer, on site during all irrigation installation operations. The superintendent shall be able to make decisions and direct the work as the representative of the contractor. It shall be the responsibility of the superintendent to notify the engineer of work accomplished and to maintain a set of plans on the site at all times on which all field adjustments or deviations from the drawings are to be recorded for the preparation of the as- built drawings. The field plans shall at all times be available for the inspection of the engineer.
9. Electrical work.
(a) 120 volt service All 120 volt service shall be installed by a licensed electrical contractor in accordance with N.E.C. this includes the switches, meters, breakers, plugs and all other appurtenances necessary to the safety and proper operation of the system.
(b) Low voltage service. All low voltage electrical work shall be accomplished by a licensed irrigation contractor in accordance with the requirements of state law and as set forth herein.
Acceptance-
a. Install, maintain, and adjust the controller program or any other part of the irrigation system(s) to insure the proper distribution and delivery of water to the plant material.
48-294 3603 11-03
b. Inspect, repair and/or replace any equipment that is found defective or may be damaged by other maintenance activities.
c. Make any adjustments that may become necessary to insure the proper delivery of water to the plant material.
2. As-built drawing. Prior to acceptance of the project, the engineer shall inspect project. Prior to acceptance the contractor shall furnish the engineer a set of as-built drawings on reproducible film base sheets prepared by a qualified draftsman. The engineer will check base sheets to be sure they are a true reflection of the project conditions and will direct the contractor to correct any errors that are found. The drawings shall show all valve locations by triangulation from a fixed object and any change to sprinkler head location and rerouting of main and/or lateral lines. Any changes of this nature shall be approved by the engineer prior to field installation. Project shall not be acceptable until accurate as-built drawings are provided to the engineer. The engineer may provide assistance in the creation of as-built drawings using TxDOT computer drawing systems at the contractor's request. Contractor shall coordinate this operation with the engineer.
3. Operating and maintenance data. The contractor shall provide instructions covering full operation, care and maintenance of the equipment, and instruct owner’s personnel in the proper operation of the controller and system.
4. Test. Testing of the system for leakage shall be in accordance with item 170. The contractor shall also test and assure the proper electrical working order of the system to the satisfaction of the engineer. Test shall not be conducted over a weekend or holiday so that engineer may inspect test.
49-294 3603 11-03 02800 – LANDSCAPING
02800.164 - SEEDING
164.1. Description. This Item shall govern for preparing ground, providing for sowing of seeds, mulching with straw, hay, or cellulose fiber and other management practices on areas shown on the plans and in accordance with this Item.
It includes seeding for permanent erosion control and seeding for temporary erosion control during the initial winter season.
164.2. Materials.
(1) Seed. All seed must meet the requirements of the Texas Seed Law including the labeling requirements for showing pure live seed (PLS = purity x germination), name and type of seed. Seed furnished shall be of the previous season's crop and the date of analysis shown on each bag shall be within nine months of the time of use on the project. Each variety of seed shall be furnished and delivered in separate bags or containers. A sample of each variety of seed shall be furnished for analysis and testing when directed by the Engineer. Buffalograss shall be treated with a dormancy method approved by the Engineer. The species and varieties of seed shall be from among the types specified herein.
164.3. Construction Methods. After designated areas have been completed to the lines, grades and cross sections shown on the plans and as provided for in other items of this contract, seeding shall be performed in accordance with the requirements hereinafter described. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, all areas to be seeded shall be cultivated to a depth of at least four (4) inches, except where seeding is to be done using a seed drill suitable for seeding into untilled soil. The seedbeds shall be cultivated sufficiently to reduce the soil to a state of good tilth when the soil particles on the surface are small enough and lie closely enough together to prevent the seed from being covered too deeply for optimum germination. Cultivation of the seedbed will not be required in loose sand where depth of sand is four (4) inches or more. The cross section previously established shall be maintained throughout the process of cultivation. Any necessary reshaping shall be done prior to any planting of seed.
(1) Drill Seeding. The seed or seed mixture, in the quantity specified, shall be uniformly distributed over the areas shown on the plans or where directed by the Engineer. All varieties of seed, as well as fertilizer, may be distributed simultaneously provided that each component is uniformly applied at the specified rate. Seed shall be drilled at a depth of from 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch utilizing a pasture or rangeland type drill. All drilling shall be along the contour of the slope. After planting, the area shall be rolled with a roller integral to the seed drill, or a light corrugated drum roller or with another type of roller approved by the Engineer. All rolling of sloped areas shall be on the contour of the slopes. Grass seed shall be applied where indicated on plan as follows:
95,000 sf.: grass mix consisting of 66% “Topgun buffalo”/34% blue grama). 1 pound per 1000 sf. Seed rate - apply by drill seeder.
9500 sf.: “Blackjack Bermuda”. 1 pound per 1000 sf seed rate – apply by drill seeder.
164.4. Pre-Construction Conference. Prior to beginning work on the project and soon after the award of the contract, a conference shall be held between the representatives of the engineer, the contractor, and any sub-contractors that will be involved in the landscape and
50-294 3603 11-03 irrigation work. In addition, at this conference the contractor shall be responsible for furnishing the engineer with all of the following as specified herein or as directed by the engineer:
1. Samples of all materials, except plants, to be used on the project with identification as to product name, location, phone number (including area code) and mailing address of product source and manufacturer, if different from source, content of product, amount of each ingredient in the product, and manufacturer's directions as to use and application of the product, if applicable.
2. Manufacturer's literature of all materials to be installed on the project.
3. Any and all state and federal certifications stating that the plant materials are free from disease and insect infestation.
4. The nursery locations, names, phone numbers (including area codes), and mailing addresses where the contractor intends to procure the plant material for the project so they may be inspected by the engineer at the source. Also, indicate which materials shall be used from each nursery.
5. A plan for transporting plant materials as specified in these general notes.
6. All irrigation equipment data and product literature and as specified under item 170, "materials" of these general notes.
7. One copy of the national arborist associations' - "tree, shrub, and other woody plant maintenance standard practices."
8. All license information as described herein – (irrigator's license).
9. Alternative means and methods whereby owners/public may be provided access through the construction zone and protections that may be put in place to respond to both the contractors' and the public's needs.
10. Proposed plan and description of materials and methods for protection of existing construction during the work.
02800.192 - PLANTING AND ESTABLISHMENT
192.1. Description. This Item shall govern for providing the specified plants and other materials, the initial installation of plants and other materials, any required repair or replacement of plants and other materials and establishment thereof as shown on the plans.
192.2. General.
(1) Plant Standards. Unless shown on the plans, the following published standards will apply. Standards for nursery stock will be as stated in the "American Standard for Nursery Stock", as published by the American Association of Nurserymen, Incorporated. Botanical names as shown on the plans will be as stated in the "Standardized Plant Names" by the American Joint
51-294 3603 11-03 Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature. Pruning standards will be as set forth by the National Arborist Association in the "Pruning Standards for Shade Trees".
(2) License Requirements.
(a) Pesticide. The Contractor shall be a licensed pesticide applicator or employ a licensed pesticide applicator for the treatment of insects, diseases, and animals as required by the Texas Pesticide Laws and Regulations of the Texas Department of Agriculture. The Engineer may require documentation of such certification as necessary for his records.
(b) Herbicide. The Contractor shall possess a permit or employ a person who possesses a permit to apply herbicide as required by the Texas Herbicide Law of the Texas Department of Agriculture. The Engineer may require documentation of such certification as necessary for his records.
(c) Irrigation. The Contractor shall possess an irrigator's license issued by the State of Texas and the Texas Board of Irrigators or employ such a licensed irrigator to perform the irrigation system maintenance. The irrigation system shall be maintained under the supervision of the licensed irrigator who shall be available on the site as required by the Engineer. The Engineer may require documentation of such license for his records. The Contractor shall verify and adhere to the requirements and codes of any controlling utility authorities.
192.3. Materials.
(1) Preservation of Cultural Resources. When it is necessary to obtain material sources off the right of way, the Contractor's attention is directed to Article 7.17.
(2) Plant Material. All plants shall be healthy nursery grown stock unless otherwise shown on the plans. Nursery grown stock, either in containers or in the field, shall be nursery grown in accordance with accepted horticultural practices and under climatic conditions similar to those of the project site for at least twelve (12) months, unless specifically authorized otherwise by the Engineer.
(a) Container Plants. Soil volume for containers shall be three-fourths (3/4) the depth of the container or greater and contain roots of the plant throughout the root ball.
(i) Containerized Stock. This stock will be defined as nursery plant stock transplanted from a growing site with a ball of soil, containing the root system, left intact and placed into a container and grown in that container continuously long enough for the new fibrous roots to have developed so that the root mass retains its shape and holds together after removal from the container. Containerized stock shall have been grown in the delivered containers for at least six (6) months, but not over two (2) years.
(ii) Container Grown Stock. This stock will be defined as nursery plant stock which has been planted in a container as a liner, seed or by other propagation method, and which has been systematically replanted or stepped up in larger containers as required, and which has developed a root system in a planting medium capable of sustaining acceptable plant growth, and which has
52-294 3603 11-03 become established in the container and exhibits a well rooted condition as evidenced by the soil ball remaining intact when removed from its container.
(b) Balled and Burlapped Stock. This stock will be defined as nursery plant stock which has been removed from the growing site with a ball of soil, containing the root system, left intact and encased in burlap (or other approved similar material) to hold the soil in place. Ball sizes for balled and burlapped stock shall be as shown on the plans.
(c) Bare Root Stock. This stock will be defined as nursery plant stock which has been removed from the growing site with the root system substantially free of soil. Bare root stock shall have a well-branched root system, characteristic of the species. The approved minimum root spread and condition shall be as shown on the plans.
(d) Collected Stock. This stock will be defined as plant stock which has been removed from its original native habitat. All collected stock shall have specific approval of the Engineer before it can be removed from its existing habitat. This shall include on site visual inspection, acceptance and tagging. Tags shall be furnished by the Contractor. Ball sizes for collected stock shall be as shown on the plans, and shall be of such a diameter and depth to encompass enough fibrous and feeding root system as necessary for the full recovery of the plant. Collection may be by hand or mechanical method. For balled and burlapped or mechanical transplanting of collected plant materials refer to Article 192.4.
(e) Bag Grown Stock. This stock will be defined as nursery plant stock transplanted into a nonwoven fabric container which has been placed in the ground and the plant grown under nursery field conditions continuously long enough (normally one (1) month for each inch of bag diameter, i.e., a plant with a 24" diameter bag, grown in its original planted location for 24 months) for the fibrous roots to have developed so that the root mass retains its shape and holds together after removal of the bag. The root ball shall be flat bottomed and straight sided. Ball sizes for bag grown stock shall be as shown on the plans. Bag grown stock shall not be pruned before delivery.
(f) Other Plant Materials. Other plant materials shall be as shown on the plans.
(3) Plant Size. Plants will be measured when branches are in their normal position. Height and spread dimensions as shown on the plans, refer to the main body of the plant and not branch tip to tip. Plants having a spreading or semispreading habit will be measured by the average diameter of the spread. Plant heights will be measured by the mean height.
Caliper measurements will be taken at a point on the trunk six (6) inches above natural ground line for trees up to four (4) inches in caliper and at a point twelve (12) inches above natural ground line for trees over four (4) inches in caliper. The caliper size for multi-trunked plants will be determined by adding the calipers of the largest cane and one-half (1/2) the caliper(s) of the second and third largest cane(s).
When a range of size is shown on the plans, no plant shall be less than the minimum size and at least 40% of the plants shall be as large as the maximum size shown on the plans. The required measurements are the minimum sizes acceptable and are the measurements after pruning, when pruning is required.
53-294 3603 11-03 Sizes of plants or plant types such as palms, roses, vines, groundcovers, seedlings, bulbs, corms, tubers, young plants, understock, etc. will be measured in accordance with the plant standards or as shown on the plans.
(4) Rejection of Plants. Plant material having any of the following features will be subject to rejection:
1. An excessive amount of abrasions of the bark; 2. Dried or damaged root system; 3. Dried or damaged top wood of deciduous plants, or dried or damaged foliage and top wood of evergreens; 4. Prematurely opened or damaged buds; 5. Disease or insect infestation, including eggs or larvae; 6. Dry, loose, cracked, broken, and/or undersized balls or containers which do not conform to the sizes shown on the plans; 7. Evidence of heating, molding, freezing, wind burn, sunscald, etc.; 8. Container plants that are overgrown or root-bound; 9. Plants with bench balls (roots repacked with soil); 10. Plant balls encased in nonbiodegradable plastic or other impervious material; 11. Field grown or collected plants transplanted into containers less than six (6) months or more than two (2) years; 12. Trees which have damaged, pruned, crooked or multiple leaders, unless multiple leaders are specified or are normal for the species; 13. Plants with disfiguring knots or fresh cuts of limbs over three-quarters inch (3/4") that have not completely calloused; 14. Plants that do not possess a normal balance between height and spread for the species; 15. Plant containers that are not structurally sound (cracked, bent, etc.) 16. Plants in containers with less than three-fourths (3/4) planting medium depth; 17. Any endangered or threatened plants; or plants of historical significance that have been collected; 18. Any other physical damage or adverse conditions that would prevent thriving growth or cause an unacceptable appearance; or 19. Plants that do not meet the standards shown on the plans.
(5) Mulch. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, mulch material shall consist of loose organic residue derived from plants or granular material as approved by the Engineer. It shall be of such nature that adequate protection is provided against sun baking and quick drying of the soil, and shall not impede aeration or water penetration nor deplete the soil nitrogen. Mulch material shall be free of excess amounts of large leaves and sticks that would prevent proper dressing of the mulched surface, free of harmful substances and free of detrimental amounts of soil or other foreign matter that would promote early compaction, matting or deterioration of the mulch.
(6) Peat Moss. Peat moss shall be of sphagnum origin.
(7) Backfill. Backfill shall be a loose friable sterilized material secured from an approved source. It shall be virtually free of reproductive parts of noxious weeds and shall be thoroughly mixed in the proportions shown on the plans. When shown on the plans, material excavated from the planting pit (excluding any rocks) may be used as backfill.
54-294 3603 11-03
(8) Nursery Plant Containers. The sizes and volumes for the more common larger containers shall be as shown in Tables 1A and 1B: (9) TABLE 1A POT SIZES
Container Minimu Minimum Minimum Class Minimum m Inside True Or Nominal Vertical Inside Bottom Volume Size * Depth Top Diameter Cu.In. Gallons Diameter 1 gallon 6.0" 6.0" 5.0" 142.6 0.62 2 gallon 7.5" 7.5" 6.5" 288.6 1.25 3 gallon 8.5" 9.5" 8.5" 540.7 2.34 4 gallon 10.5" 9.75" 8.75" 705.6 3.05 5 gallon 11.0" 9.75" 8.75" 740.0 3.20 7 gallon 11.0" 12.25" 11.0" 1,167.5 5.05 10 gallon 14.0" 14.0" 13.0" 2,004.0 8.68 15 gallon 15.0" 15.0" 13.5" 2,392.5 10.36 20 gallon 16.0" 18.5" 16.0" 3,740.0 16.19 25 gallon 16.0" 22.0" 17.5" 4,900.0 21.21 30 gallon 17.0" 22.0" 19.0" 5,608.0 24.28 45 gallon 17.5" 30.0" 23.5" 9,835.0 42.58 50 gallon 20.0" 29.0" 23.0" 10,619. 46.00 55 gallon 22.0" 29.0" 23.0" 0 51.00 65 gallon 22.0" 31.0" 26.0" 11,781. 60.75 95 gallon 23.0" 37.0" 31.0" 0 90.40 100 gallon 23.0" 36.0" 30.0" 14,035. 85.00 200 gallon 28.0" 48.0" 40.0" 0 184.30 20,882. 0 19,670. 0 42,575. 0 * Sized by trade designation which is not equal to true gallon volumes.
55-294 3603 11-03
TABLE 1B BOX SIZES
Nominal Approx. Approx. Box Size Inside True (Approx. Approx. Square Volume Inside Square Vertical Bottom Top Depth Dimensions Cu.In. Gallons Dimensions) 14" box 12" 12" 2,028 8.8 20" box 18" 16" 5,832 25.0 24" box 22" 20" 10,648 46.0 30" box 27" 24" 19,683 85.0 36" box 32" 30" 34,848 150.0 42" box 32" 30" 41,472 180.0 48" box 36" 36" 63,504 275.0 60" box 42" 42" 109,242 475.0
Any container that does not meet the minimum specifications for pots or the approximate specifications for boxes as shown in Tables 1A and 1B will be considered unclassified and must be approved by the Engineer prior to plant installation.
(9) Water. Water shall conform to the requirements of Article 168.2.
(10) Supports. Plant supports shall be of the type shown on the plans.
(11) Flagging Tape. Flagging tape shall be highly reflective, visible at night, and approved by the Engineer.
(12) Tree Wrapping. Tree wrapping shall be of the type shown on the plans.
(13) Fertilizer. Fertilizer shall conform to the requirements of Article 166.2.
(14) Pesticides including Herbicides. Pesticides including herbicides shall be of the types that are commercially available and shown on the plans.
(15) Antitranspirants. Antitranspirants, intended to prevent evaporation, shall be of the types that are commercially available and approved by the Engineer.
192.4. Construction Methods.
(1) General. The limits, for the purpose of site preparation, mowing, installation, cleanup and establishment operations, as required under this Item, will include all area(s) shown on the plans. All planting operations and associated work shall be confined to these areas and such other areas of the right-of-way that may be required to gain access to the site(s) specified herein. Insofar as possible, the Contractor shall vary access routes across the right-of-way to prevent any damage 56-294 3603 11-03 to slopes and existing vegetation. The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair and replacement of damaged slopes and vegetation which, in the opinion of the Engineer, could have been avoided.
(2) Site Amenities and Protection. During the execution of the work, utmost care shall be exercised to prevent damage to any utilities, structures, right-of-way or other site amenities.
The Contractor shall not repair or service any equipment or perform any operations on the right-of-way which may mar the landscape by rendering the soil sterile, damage existing vegetation or which may have an adverse effect on the proposed use of the land. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the work site in a neat appearance and safe condition at all times.
(3) Inspection and Certification Prior to Delivery. All plants inspected by the Engineer at the nursery and at the original native habitat of the collected stock shall be tagged with serialized self-locking tags if required by the Engineer. Plants delivered to the site without these tags or with broken tags may be sufficient reason for rejection. Tags shall be furnished by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide certification that all plants conform to the requirements of Subarticle 192.3.(2).
(4) Delivery and Storage. The Engineer shall be notified of a proposed plant material delivery time at least 48 hours prior to its arrival at the project. Each plant material shipment shall be accompanied by an invoice showing the number, size and name (common and botanical) of each of the kinds of plant material. All plants shall be individually tagged with nursery name tags designating the genus, species and variety of the plant.
The Engineer will make an inspection of the plant stock upon delivery to ensure that the plants comply with these specifications. Any plants rejected shall be immediately removed and replaced. Unless plants are planted in a timely manner as specified herein, they shall be properly "heeled in" or stored.
Plants shall be properly maintained during delivery, handling, storage and planting. The Engineer may inspect any phase of work and may reject any plant material improperly maintained.
(5) Staking of Planting Locations. All locations of trees, shrubs and beds shall be staked in the field by the Contractor. All locations will be approved by the Engineer prior to any excavation of plant pits or bed preparation. Stakes shall be placed and coded to denote the type of plant material.
(6) Excavation of Planting Pits.
(a) General. The Contractor shall not excavate plant pits more than 24 hours in advance of planting operations. Any plant pits left unattended for any length of time which may present a hazard shall be covered and/or clearly flagged as approved by the Engineer. The walls and bottoms of all plant pits shall be scarified immediately prior to the placement of plants.
57-294 3603 11-03 (b) Pit Sizes. Planting pits may be dug by hand or by mechanical means and shall be circular or square (according to the shape of the root ball) with vertical sides, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Planting pit sizes shall be as follows, unless otherwise shown on the plans:
(i) A minimum horizontal dimension of twelve (12) inches between the root ball and the sides of the planting pit for the following plant specifications:
* Containers of fifteen (15) gallon size or larger. * Boxes of fourteen (14) inch size or larger. * Balled and burlapped or bag grown plants with a root ball diameter larger than fourteen (14) inches.
(ii) A minimum horizontal dimension of two (2) times the diameter of the root ball for the following plant specifications:
* Containers of less than fifteen (15) gallon size. * Balled and burlapped or bag grown plants with a root ball diameter of fourteen (14) inches or less.
(iii) A minimum diameter for bare root plants to permit the roots to spread without crowding or curving around the walls of the pit.
(iv) Planting pits shall be excavated to a depth of at least four (4) inches but not more than eight (8) inches greater than the depth of the root ball of balled and burlapped, containerized, container grown or bag grown plants; or the depth of the root system of bare root plants. Pits dug to excess depths shall be backfilled and compacted to bring the pits to the specified depth. The depth of pits on slopes will be measured at the lower side.
(v) When performing mechanical transplanting the receiving plant pit shall be excavated with the same type of equipment used to remove the plant material or as approved by the Engineer.
(7) Planting Season. All planting shall be performed as shown in Table 2 or as approved by the Engineer.
58-294 3603 11-03 TABLE 2 PLANTING SEASONS
STOCK PLANTING DATES Containerized or None specified container grown
Balled and burlapped November 15 to March 15
Bare Root January 15 to March 15
Bag Grown September 15 to April 15
Collected As shown on the plans or as approved by the Engineer.
(8) Planting and Backfilling. In general, the top of the root ball shall stand, after settlement of the backfill, approximately level with the finish grade. When shown on the plans, fertilizer of the type and quantity specified shall be added to the backfill material prior to backfilling. Unless otherwise shown on the plans or approved by the Engineer, planting and backfilling shall be as follows:
(a) Plant Basin. A basin, 8 to 10 inches deep, shall be formed by constructing a neat levee around the planting pit. The inside measurement of the basin shall not be less than the minimum specified diameter of the planting pit, unless otherwise shown on the plans. On slopes, the backfill on the lower side shall be graded in such a manner that an adequate basin will be provided.
As shown on the plans, either material excavated from the planting pit (excluding any rocks) or Backfill, as specified in Subarticle 192.3.(7), may be used to form a basin around the plant. Excess excavated material may be scattered thinly and leveled off provided it is of such consistency and character that it can be readily scattered in an acceptable manner. If scattering of the material may interfere with drainage or mowing, all such material shall be removed and disposed of as approved by the Engineer.
(b) Bare Root Plants. After the backfill in the bottom of the planting pit has been firmed and the plant placed in the proper position, as shown on the plans, loose friable backfill shall be worked about the roots and thoroughly settled with water as the backfill is made. Care shall be taken to avoid bruising or breaking the roots. No sticks, sod, clods or other material which may form large air pockets in the soil or backfill shall be included in the backfill.
(c) Balled and Burlapped Plants. Plants of this type shall not be handled by the stems or in such manner that the soil of the ball may be loosened. The burlap shall not be removed from the ball. After the backfill in the bottom of the pit has been firmed and the plant placed in the proper position as shown on the plans, loose friable backfill shall be worked about the ball in twelve (12) inch layers until the pit is two-thirds (2/3) full. The burlap shall then be opened on top of the root
59-294 3603 11-03 ball to expose the top one-third (1/3) of the root ball. The pit shall be filled with water and the backfilling completed, working the backfill and water well to prevent any air pockets.
For ball supporting devices such as wire baskets, the basket shall not be removed. The plant shall be placed in the prepared planting pit in the proper position and backfill shall be placed around the ball until the pit is about one-third (1/3) full. The basket shall be carefully removed to just above the backfill, leaving the bottom portion intact. Backfilling shall be completed as shown above.
(d) Containerized or Container Grown Plants. At the time of planting the root ball shall be carefully removed from the container to prevent damage to the plant and root ball. Container plants shall be placed and backfilled in the same manner as balled and burlapped plants.
(e) Bag Grown Plants. Prior to planting, the fabric bag shall be removed by using a knife to cut the side of the bag from top to bottom in three or four places of equidistance around the root ball. The bag shall be carefully peeled down and roots that do not easily peel away from the bag shall be pruned. The plastic bottom shall then be pulled from under the root ball. Bag grown plants shall be placed and backfilled in the same manner as balled and burlapped plants.
(9) Mechanical Transplanting.
(a) Equipment. Machinery shall be maintained in good operating condition. All blades shall be true to their designed spade and free of bends which could interfere with its operation. The tree spade shall be mounted on a suitable, stable machine capable of supporting the weight of all excavated materials and heavy enough to force all blades into the soil to the proper depth.
(b) Transplanting Methods. Mechanical transplanting of trees shall be in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations.
Root balls which disintegrate or plants which cannot be secured within their root balls will be rejected. This shall include plants with excessive tap roots which cannot be thoroughly cut with the blades of the transplanting machine.
Roots which protrude beyond the limits of the transplant machine blades shall be neatly cut with an instrument specifically designed for this procedure before transplanting plants to their final planting location. The Contractor shall secure tops of plants to minimize drying during trans- planting and to minimize structural damage due to wind, passing vehicles, overhead structures or other circumstances.
(c) Planting and Backfilling. After the backfill in the bottom of the planting pit has been firmed and the plant placed in the proper position, as shown on the plans, sand shall be worked about the roots and thoroughly settled with water as the backfill is made. Care shall be taken to avoid bruising or breaking the roots. No sticks, sod, clods or other material which may form large air pockets in the soil or backfill shall be included in the backfill.
(10) Vegetative Watering. During the planting operations, the Contractor shall keep the ground and backfill material moist to at least twelve (12) inches around the root ball. The Contractor shall be required to meet the minimum watering requirements shown for all
60-294 3603 11-03 circumstances by a method approved by the Engineer. When an irrigation system is shown on the plans, the Contractor shall coordinate his work to insure that the irrigation system is operational as the plants are installed.
(11) Antitranspirants. When shown on the plans, the Contractor shall apply antitranspirants in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the Engineer.
(12) Pruning. Plants shall not be pruned immediately before delivery to the project site, unless otherwise shown on the plans or as approved by Engineer. Common nursery pruning practices are acceptable. Any necessary pruning shall be done at the time of planting as approved by the Engineer and shall be appropriate to the various types of plants and the special requirements of each.
From 20% to 40% of all foliage of mechanically transplanted plants shall be removed by pruning interior branching, entangled limbs and small branches. Structural branching shall not be removed prior to planting. Branch tips shall not be removed to attain the above percentage.
Balled and burlapped deciduous plants shall be pruned to ultimately reduce foliage by approximately one-third (1/3) of that existing prior to digging and shall be performed in such a manner as to retain the natural shape of the plant. Containerized, container grown and bag grown plants shall not be pruned for shape or foliage reduction. All plants shall be pruned as necessary to remove damaged twigs, branches and roots and as much additional as required by the Engineer. All pruning shall be accomplished with tools specifically designed for this purpose. All pruned material shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of in a manner approved by the Engineer.
(13) Plant Supports. Plant supports such as staking, guying, and bracing shall be as shown on the plans or as required by the Engineer.
Trees shall be staked, guyed or braced for support during the same day as planted. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, plants shall stand approximately vertical after staking, guying, or bracing. The Contractor shall be responsible for material remaining approximately vertical and straight for all given conditions and shall repair plant supports as often as required until final acceptance of the project.
(14) Safety Flagging Tape. Staking, guying, or bracing which present a hazard shall be clearly flagged as shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer.
(15) Tree Trunk Protection. All trees shown on the plans to be wrapped shall be neatly and securely wrapped with a commercial tree wrapping material approved by the Engineer. The wrapping shall begin at the base of the trunk and extend upward with a 50% overlap to the second whorl of branches. Wrapping material shall be secured at the top of the wrap with soft twine or weatherproof tape, or any suitable method as approved by the Engineer. Wire, metal bands or other material for this purpose that may cause injury or damage to plants shall not be used.
(16) Mulching. All plants shall receive mulching to a depth of two (2) to three (3) inches within the water basin or across the beds unless otherwise shown on the plans. A small amount of
61-294 3603 11-03 backfill shall be sprinkled on top of the organic mulch to hold it in place if directed by the Engineer.
(17) Plant Material Removal and Replacement. A plant shall be removed and replaced as directed by the Engineer at any time during execution of the work under this Item including the Establishment Period if, in the judgment of the Engineer, a plant is found to be in any of the following conditions:
(a) Dead; (b) Dying; (c) Wilted for 48 hours or more; or (d) Any other signs of detrimental consequence.
All replacement plants shall be the same species, size and quality as originally specified. The Contractor shall make every effort to ensure that the replacement material receives any additional care and maintenance required for the replacement plants to become well established. The Engineer will require replacement of plant material until satisfied that all of the plants on the project are in a healthy, vigorous condition. This is subject to the exception noted in Section 192.4.(18).(i).
(18) Establishment Period. The Contractor shall perform all of the activities listed below during placement of all of the plants. Prior to acceptance of the project installation, as shown on the plans and as approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall perform the following activities:
(a) Mulching, Plant Basin and Bed Maintenance. The Contractor shall reshape or reform the existing plant basins and beds as necessary to conform to the plans, and as approved by the Engineer. As a part of the plant basin and bed maintenance, weeds and grass shall be removed prior to the application of mulch. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the mulch shall be maintained to a minimum depth of two (2) to three (3) inches.
The Contractor shall maintain the plant basins, beds and site fixtures generally free of weeds and grass or other materials detrimental to the growth of the plants or appearance of the site. Herbicides (glyphosate or others as approved by the Engineer), if used by the Contractor, shall be limited to the plant basin and perimeter thereof or around site fixtures as approved by the Engineer. Extreme care shall be taken to insure that the herbicide does not come into contact with any part of the desirable plants. Under no circumstances shall the herbicide be used on days where the wind could cause drift hazard to desirable plants. The Contractor shall also follow the manufacturer's instruction for the use and application of any herbicide.
(b) Plant Irrigation. The Contractor shall be required to meet the minimum watering requirements for all circumstances by a method approved by the Engineer as stated under Subarticle 192.4.(10) and/or as shown on the plans.
Watering equipment other than an existing irrigation system shall have adequate and accurate measuring devices as approved by the Engineer.
(c) Mowing and Trimming. The Contractor shall mow and trim the areas shown on the plans. The work shall be performed at the frequency as shown on the plans. The initial cycle shall
62-294 3603 11-03 begin when directed by the Engineer. Mowing heights shall be as shown on the plans or approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall use power equipment as approved by the Engineer. Nylon cord trimmers shall not be used inside the plant basins or beds around plant material.
(d) Restaking, Reguying, and Rebracing of Plants. Any damaged or destroyed stakes, guys or braces shall be replaced by the Contractor in accordance with the details shown on the plans. This shall include any adjustment to the staking or guying to prevent girdling of plants.
(e) Pruning. When directed by the Engineer or shown on the plans, plants shall be pruned by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Dead or damaged limbs on trees and shrubs, including sucker-growth on trunks of trees, shall be removed. All pruning shall be accomplished with tools specifically designed for this purpose. All pruned material shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of in a manner approved by the Engineer.
(f) Insect, Disease and Animal Control. The Contractor shall be required to notify the Engineer in writing of problems with insects, diseases, or animals as such problems arise. The Contractor also shall recommend corrective measures in writing.
The Contractor shall treat the plants and/or the planted areas in accordance with accepted methods of horticultural practices and the Texas Department of Agriculture guidelines regarding the use of pesticides. The Contractor also shall follow the manufacturer's instructions for the use and application of any pesticides.
(g) Litter Pick-Up. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the Contractor shall collect and dispose of all litter within the landscaped areas. The work shall be performed at the frequency shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. All litter shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
(h) Fertilization. The Contractor shall furnish and apply fertilizer only to those plants as shown on the plans. The analysis, times, and rates of application shall be as shown on the plans. The type of fertilizer and method of application shall be as shown on the plans or as approved by the Engineer.
(i) Plant Removal. In the judgment of the Engineer, any plant which is dead or dying for reasons beyond the control of the Contractor and is not to be replaced shall be removed by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer. This shall include repair of the plant pit and surrounding area.
192.5. Acceptability of Plants and Other Materials, Installation and Establishment. The Engineer will make an inspection of the project to determine its acceptability as shown on the plans at or near the end of the 90 day establishment period. At this time, an inventory of missing, dead or rejected plant material will be made and the Contractor notified as to which plants on the inventory shall be replanted within the time limits for replacement as specified by the Engineer. Plant material for the replacement planting shall meet all the requirements specified for the original plant material and shall be planted in accordance with Article 192.4.
63-294 3603 11-03 PLANTING AND ESTABLISHMENT GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
All materials shall be as specified or approved equals.
Staking of plant material locations- All tree locations shall be staked in the field by the contractor, and approved by the engineer, prior to ditching of irrigation system and/or excavation of tree pits. Stakes shall be easily readable and shall be labeled to denote tree varieties. After staking the contractor shall notify the engineer for staking inspection and shall relocate stakes as directed by the engineer if required. Contractor shall provide 48 hours notice to engineer for staking inspection and adjustments if necessary.
Planting soil-for application in tree/bed areas)- Planting soil used for planting tree/bed and grass area preparation and backfilling shall be a thoroughly blended mixture, prepared in accordance with item 1058:
Planting soil shall be compost manufactured topsoil (CMT). Planting soil shall be placed, and raked off to a level condition to permit installation of plant material, and other materials shown on details or as noted herein, and allow flood irrigation to occur.
Mulch materials-surface mulch application shall be required in tree/bed areas. Entire surface area of tree/bed areas shall have surface mulch application at a depth of 2” when placed dry. All mulch for surface application shall be a nonfloat shredded cypress mulch. Mulch shall be subject to the approval of the engineer.
Tree trunk guard-all trees shall have a 6” height flexible plastic trunk guard equipped with integral protrusions to link guards together as trees grow. Trunk guards shall be subject to the approval of the engineer.
Tree staking and materials for tree staking-staking shall consist of (3) 8’ metal ‘t’ stakes spaced equidistant and outside of dug hole (5’) from the trunk of each tree. #12 wire and nylon webbed hose shall be used to brace and stay trees to stakes. Tree staking and guying shall be installed as directed by the engineer.
Fertilizer application at planting-
Plants: At planting, all trees, and plants shall receive an application of "healthy start": 21 gram, 12-8-8 analysis, fertilizer tablets by Plant Health Care, Inc. (800) 421-9051/(940) 483-1766, or approved equal. The contractor shall submit manufacturer's literature and data for approval of the engineer at the preconstruction meeting. The tablets shall be placed per manufacturer's recommendations or as directed by the engineer, at up to but not exceeding 1.5 times the rate specified by the manufacturer.
Throughout the contract period, the contractor shall provide a quantity and frequency of water to keep the plant material healthy and viable as part of this contract. The irrigation system shall be used to facilitate the establishment of plant material.
64-294 3603 11-03 Contractor shall make the engineer aware of the time and frequency of scheduled waterings by the irrigation system. The irrigation system may be rescheduled based on site inspection during maintenance to give plant material a balanced water diet and to prevent over-watering or drought.
Pruning at planting- Any necessary pruning shall be done as directed by the engineer.
Plant material (15 gal) - Ilex vomitoria, yaupon holly; Container: minimum #15 container. Caliper: minimum 2" Height: minimum 5' Spread: minimum 1.5' Remarks: plants shall be of specimen quality, full, and symmetrical with a superior growth Habit for the species. Plants shall be fully rooted out in container and nursery grown.
Plant material (5 gal) - quercus macrocarpa, bur oak; ulmus crassifolia, cedar elm; Container: minimum #5 container. Height: minimum 16" (shade trees: 2.5') Spread: minimum 12" Remarks: plants shall be of specimen quality, full, and symmetrical with a superior growth Habit for the species. Plants shall be fully rooted out in container and nursery grown.
Plant material (1 gal)- Perrenial lantana (patriot lantana, gold mound, new gold, confetti, lavender swirl, dwarf red, etc); and/or other plants in this size as directed by the engineer. Container: minimum #1 Height: minimum 9” Spread: minimum 9” Remarks: plants shall be of specimen quality, full, and symmetrical with a superior growth Habit for the species. Plants shall be fully rooted out in container and nursery grown.
Care, handling, and quality of plant material- All plants shall be true to species and variety and shall conform to measurements and conditions as specified, in accordance with "The American Standard for Nursery Stock" as published by the American Association of Nurserymen; unless otherwise agreed upon by the engineer.
Trees shall be staked and guyed for support during the same day as planting. Plants shall stand plumb after staking and guying, all plants shall receive an application of fertilizer tablets. The tablets shall be applied as hereinbefore noted. Install trunk guard on each tree according to manufacturer's instructions or as directed by engineer.
Water all plants immediately after planting. Smooth planting area to conform to the specified grades after full settlement has occurred. Apply surface mulch.
Pre-construction conference: see section 2800.164.4.
65-294 3603 11-03
2800.1058 - COMPOST 1058.1 Description. Furnish and place compost as shown on the plans. 1058.2 Materials. Furnish compost that has been produced by aerobic (biological) decomposition of organic matter and meets the requirements set forth by the United States Department of Agriculture and the United States Composting Council (USCC), “Test Methods for the Examination of Composting and Compost” (TMECC), shown in Table 1. Compost feedstock may include, but is not limited to, leaves and yard trimmings, biosolids, food scraps, food-processing residuals, manure or other agricultural residuals, forest residues, bark, and paper. Ensure compost and wood chips do not contain any visible refuse, other physical contaminants, or any substance considered to be harmful to plant growth. Do not use materials that have been treated with chemical preservatives as a compost feedstock or as wood chips. Do not use mixed municipal solid waste compost. Provide compost meeting all applicable United States Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 40, Part 503 standards for Class A biosolids and Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) health and safety regulations as defined in the Texas Administrative Code (TAC), Chapter 332, including the time and temperature standards in Subchapter B, Part 23. Meet the requirements of the USCC Seal of Testing Assurance (STA) program.
Table 1 Physical Requirements for Compost Particle Size: 95% passing 5/8 in., 70% passing 3/8 in. in accordance with TMECC 02.02-B, “Sample Sieving for Aggregate Size Classification” Heavy Metals: Pass in accordance with TMECC 04.06, “Heavy Metals and Hazardous Elements” 04.06-As, Arsenic 04.06-Hg, Mercury 04.06-Be, Beryllium 04.06-Mo, Molybdenum 04.06-Cd, Cadmium 04.06-Ni, Nickel 04.06-Cu, Copper 04.06-Se, Selenium 04.06-Pb, Lead 04.06-Zn, Zinc Soluble Salts: 5.0 max.* dS/m in accordance with TMECC 04.10-A, “1:5 Slurry Method, Mass Basis” pH: 5.5 – 8.5 in accordance with TMECC 04.11-A, “1:5 Slurry pH” Maturity: greater than 80% in accordance with TMECC 05.05-A, “Germination and Root Elongation” Organic Matter Content: 25-65% (dry mass) in accordance with TMECC 05.07-A, “Loss-On-Ignition Organic Matter Method” Stability: 8 or below in accordance with TMECC 05.08-B, “Carbon Dioxide Evolution Rate” Fecal Coliform: Pass in accordance with TMECC 07.01-B, “Fecal Coliforms” * A soluble salt content up to 10.0 dS/m for compost used in CMT will be acceptable. Before delivery of the compost, provide QC documentation that includes the following: • the feedstock by percentage in the final compost product, • a statement that the compost meets federal and state health and safety regulations, • a statement that the composting process has met time and temperature requirements,
66-294 3603 11-03 • a copy of the producer’s STA certification, and • a copy of the lab analysis, performed by an STA-certified lab, verifying that the compost meets the requirements of Table 1. When furnishing biosolids compost, also provide a copy of the current TCEQ Compliance Statement signed by the facility manager. Provide a designated project stockpile of unblended compost for sampling and testing at the producer’s site. Samples from each stockpile will be taken by the Department for QA. Make payment to the STA-certified lab chosen by the Department for the required QA testing. Submit lab invoices for passing QA tests to the Department for reimbursement. Maintain compost in designated stockpiles at the producer’s site until accepted by the Engineer. The Engineer reserves the right to sample compost at the job site. A. Compost Manufactured Topsoil (CMT). Furnish CMT consisting of 75% topsoil blended with 25% compost measured by volume. Use CMT that is either blended on- site (BOS) or pre-blended (PB) as specified on the plans. Use topsoil conforming to Article 160.2, “Materials.” B. Erosion Control Compost (ECC). Furnish ECC consisting of 50% untreated wood chips blended with 50% compost measured by volume. Use wood chips less than or equal to 5 in. in length with 95% passing a 2-in. screen and less than 30% passing a 1-in. screen. C. General Use Compost (GUC). Furnish GUC consisting of 100% compost. 1058.2.1 Construction. Prepare the types of compost for use on the project and stockpile at the jobsite. A. Compost Manufactured Topsoil (CMT). After excavation and embankment work is complete, remove and dispose of objectionable material from the topsoil before blending. Roll the CMT with a light corrugated drum when specified. 1. Blended On-Site (BOS). Apply compost in a uniform layer and incorporate into existing topsoil to the depth shown on the plans. 2. Pre-blended (PB). Apply CMT in a uniform layer to the depth shown on the plans. B. Erosion Control Compost (ECC). Use only on slopes 3:1 or flatter. After excavation and embankment work is complete, apply a 2-in. uniform layer unless otherwise shown on the plans or as directed. When rolling is specified, use a light corrugated drum roller. C. General Use Compost (GUC). Apply in a uniform layer as a top dressing on established vegetation to the depth shown on the plans. Do not bury existing vegetation. If GUC is used as a backfill ingredient, in a planting soil mixture, for planting bed preparation, or as a mulch, apply as shown on the plans.
1058.2.2. Pre-construction conference. See section 2800.164.4.
67-294 3603 11-03 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03001 - FORMWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Construction, bracing, alignment of forms.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS A. Wood forms for unexposed concrete surfaces shall be built from No. 2 Common Southern Yellow Pine Lumber or other materials of equal qualifications of sufficient thickness to be capable of sustaining the loads to be imposed thereon, dressed to uniformly smooth contact surfaces, and so constructed to be readily removable and coated with form oil. B. Wood forms for exposed concrete surfaces shall be constructed of Commercial Standard Douglas Fir, moisture-resistant, concrete form plywood, not less than five ply, and at least 9/16" thick, with one smooth face, or shall be formed with linings of one of the following types sealed with form sealer: a) Plywood: Commercial Standard Douglas Fir, concrete-form, exterior, three ply, not less than 1/4 inch having one smooth face, or b) Fiberboard: Treated, hardpressed fiberboard having a low degree of water absorption, not less than 3/16” thick, with one smooth side. C. Void Forms: Trapezoidal under beams, rectangular beneath slabs, six inches (6”) deep capable of supporting wet weight of concrete. Remove and replace any wet and/or unstable void forms. Install 1-1/2” thick grout mix over top and each side of all void forms. D. Form ties on exposed concrete surfaces shall be manufactured to allow a positive breakback of not less than one inch inside the concrete surface. Ties shall be equipped with plastic cones not less than 3/8” diameter and one inch long which will completely cover the holes and prevent leakage of any mortar. Form ties for unexposed surfaces shall be bolts, rods or patented devices having a minimum tensile strength of 3,000 lbs. when fully assembled. Ties shall be adjustable in length and free of lugs, cones, washers or other features which would leave a hole larger than 7/8" in diameter, or depressions back of the exposed surface of the concrete. Ties shall be of such construction that, when the forms are removed, there will be no metal remaining within one inch of the finished surface of the concrete. All exposed corners of interior walls, columns and beams shall be formed with VINYLEX Radius Concrete Former No. RFN-1 inch. Contact Slaughter Industries. E. Form oil shall be a non-staining, paraffin-base oil having a specific gravity of between eight-tenths (0.8) and nine-tenths (0.9).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FORMWORK
68-294 3603 11-03 A. The design and engineering of formwork as well as its construction, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Formwork shall be designed for the loads and lateral pressures outlined in Part 3, Section 02 of "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork" (ACI 347), and wind loads specified by Building Codes. B. Requirements for facing materials are described in Finishing of Formed Surfaces. The maximum deflection of facing materials reflected in concrete surfaces exposed to view shall be 1/240 of the span between structural members. Place 1" radius P.V.C. moldings in corners of column, beam and wall forms where concrete will be exposed to view. C. Where necessary to maintain specified tolerances, camber formwork to compensate for anticipated deflections in formwork due to weight and pressure of fresh concrete and due construction loads. D. Provide temporary openings at bases of wall forms and at other points where necessary to facilitate cleaning and observation, immediately before concrete is deposited. I. Form accessories to be partially or wholly embedded in concrete, such as ties and hangers, shall be a commercially manufactured type. Wire is not acceptable. II. Void Form Installation: Install void forms as detailed confined horizontally and supported vertically on compacted subgrade or fill. Install polyethylene film over void forms before placing grout or concrete. Void forms that become wet shall be removed and discarded.
3.02 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of grout or cement paste. Board forms having joints opened by shrinkage of the wood shall be swelled until closed by wetting before concrete is placed. B. Edge forms and screeds: Set edge forms and intermediate screed strips accurately to produce designed elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Align the concrete surfaces to the contours of screed strips by the use of strike-off templates.
3.03 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Formwork for walls, sides of beams and other parts not supporting weight of concrete may be removed as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations but not before concrete is 48 hours old. B. Removal strength: When formwork removal is based on concrete reaching its specified strength (or a specified percentage thereof) at an early date, concrete shall be presumed to have reached this strength when test cylinders, field cured under most unfavorable conditions prevailing for any portion of concrete represented, have reached required strength. Except for field curing and age at test, cylinders shall be molded and tested as specified.
3.04 CLEAN UP A. Upon completion of the work, remove equipment, protective coverings and any rubbish from the premises. Leave area in a clean and perfect condition.
69-294 3603 11-03 03150 - EXPANSION JOINTS IN EXTERIOR SLABS ON FILL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Expansion joint fillers, sealers, and board caps to be used for exposed poured-in- place concrete slabs on fill.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS A. Poured Joint Sealer: Sikaflex 2 part polyurethane sealant, or approved equal. B. Premolded Filler: Cane fibre asphalt impregnated conforming to ASTM D1851. C. Expansion Board Cap: Equal to #941 1/2" x 1/2" by Greenstreak Plastic Products Co., St. Louis, Mo., (800) 325-9504. D. Dowels: 3/4" diameter smooth bars, 2'-0" long, with plastic cap, one end allowing 1-1/2" expansion.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Expansion joints shall consist of premolded asphalt impregnated cane fibre filler strips, without sealer. Install premolded filler strips at proper levels in relation to finished concrete. Install dowels at 12" spacing centered in slab. Neatly finish edges of exposed concrete slabs along expansion joints with a slightly rounded edging tool. Reinforcement or other embedded metal items bonded to the concrete shall not be permitted to extend continuously through any expansion joint, unless otherwise noted on drawings. Mask areas adjacent to joints to provide straight edges of sealant. Install expansion board caps at all expansion points. B. Jointing: Joints in slabs on fill shall be located as detailed and indicated on the contract drawings and in no case shall an expansion joint occur at spaces which exceed 20'-0" o.c. Space expansion joints in exterior surfaces as indicated. Space dummy tool cross joints or saw cut joints as indicated.
3.02 CLEAN UP A. Upon completion of the work, remove equipment, protective coverings and any rubbish from the premises. Leave area in a clean and undamaged condition.
70-294 3603 11-03 03200 - REINFORCING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Reinforcing steel and accessories.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete accessories including bar supports, chairs, spacers, etc. shall be cold- drawn wire fabricated in accordance with the requirements of Section 3, Chapter 3 of the ACI Standard 315-80 with heights as required. Bar supports for concrete resting on earth shall be Individual High Chairs No. HCP with welded plates on bottom, as manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. Precast concrete briquettes supporting bar supports in paving, walks and curbs will be permissible. Top of briquettes shall be level with top of sand leveling bed. Clay briquettes will not be allowed. B. Reinforcing: All reinforcing steel shall be of domestic manufacture. Vertical column bars shall be of weldable quality. Submit mill test reports as evidence. C. Bars shall be new deformed steel conforming to the requirements of ASTM 615, Grade 60. D. Welded wire mesh shall conform to ASTM A185 and A82. Furnish in flat sheets.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing bars: Support and wire together to prevent displacement by construction loads or placing of concrete. On ground, forms, and where necessary, use supporting chairs. Over formwork, furnish concrete, metal, plastic, or other approved bar chairs and spacers. Where concrete surfaces will be exposed to the weather in finished structure or where rust would impair architectural finishes, portions of all accessories in contact with formwork shall be galvanized or made of plastic. Do not weld reinforcing. B. Lap wire mesh one full mesh on ends and at side joints. Tie as required. C. Splices: Submit shop drawings showing splices not shown on the contract drawings for approval to the Engineer.
3.02 CLEAN UP A. Upon completion of the work, remove equipment and any rubbish from the premises. Leave area in a clean and undamaged condition.
71-294 3603 11-03 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK A. Drilled Pier Foundations, Section 02362. B. Formwork, Section 03001. C. Expansion Joints, Section 03150. D. Reinforcing Steel and Accessories, Section 03200. E. Finishing and Curing Concrete, Section 03350.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Concrete for slabs, walls, beams, footings, walks, curbs and gutters. B. Concrete mix designs and testing. C. Admixtures for concrete. D. Shop drawings. E. Field testing concrete. F. Installing concrete.
1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings on reinforcing steel, embedded items, and construction joints. Approval of shop drawings shall cover general locations, spacings and details of design. Shop drawings for reinforcing steel shall indicate bending diagrams; assembly diagrams; splicing and laps of rods; shapes; dimensions and details of bar reinforcing and accessories. Scaled dimensions from structural drawings shall not be used in determining the lengths of reinforcing rods. Allow ten (10) working days in engineer's office for shop drawing review.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE QUALITY A. All concrete quality shall be in accordance with A.C.I. 318-83, Chapter 4. B. Water Reducing Concrete Admixture: Pozzilith 300 R. C. Air Entrainment: 5% air entrainment add to all exterior concrete paving, walks, steps, curbs and gutters, and walls. Master Builders "MB-VR". D. Cement: ASTM C150. E. Aggregates: Fine and course ASTM C33. F. Water for mixing and curing concrete: Shall be city water.
2.02 CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS A. The Contractor shall engage and pay for the services of a recognized independent testing agency to design the concrete mixes. Furnish reports of mix designs to the offices of the Owner, Architect, Structural Engineer and General Contractor.
2.03 TESTING OF CONCRETE
72-294 3603 11-03 A. Testing of concrete shall be done by a recognized independent testing agency selected and paid by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. B. General: Routine testing of materials and of resulting concrete for compliance with technical requirements of the contract documents shall be the duty of the testing agency. C. Testing Services: Test the proposed concrete materials for compliance with the Specifications. Conduct strength tests of concrete in accordance with ACI 318-83, Chapter 4. Report all test results in writing to the offices of the Owner, Architect, Structural Engineer, and General Contractor on same day tests are made. All test reports shall state if tests do or do not comply with project specifications.
2.04 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Joints not shown on drawings shall be so made and located to least impair the strength of the structure and must be approved by the Architect. In general, joints shall be located near the middle of interior spans of slabs and beams. Joints shall be perpendicular to the main reinforcement. See notes on drawings for unscheduled construction joints. B. All reinforcing steel shall be continuous across joints. Longitudinal keys at least 1-1/2" deep shall be provided in all joints in beams. Surfaces of concrete at joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and all laitance removed and the surface coated with an approved bonding agent just prior to placing concrete.
2.05 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place sleeves, inserts, stair nosings, anchors, and embedded items for mechanical, electrical, and other trades prior to concreting. Give ample notice and opportunity to all trades whose work is related to concrete or must be supported by it, to introduce and/or furnish embedded items before concrete is placed. Accurately position expansion joint materials and embedded items and support against displacement. Fill voids in inserts with readily removable material to prevent the entry of concrete into voids.
2.06 CONCRETE STRENGTHS A. The Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency to design the concrete mixes in conjunction with the work of his contract. All concrete shall comply with ACI 318-83 Code, proportioned according to ACI 318-83, Chapter 4, and as noted on the Drawings. B. Concrete, unless otherwise indicated on the Structural Drawings, shall have a twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength of 3000 psi and shall contain a minimum of five (5) sacks of cement per cubic yard of mix. C. Mix and deliver all concrete in conformity with the requirements for Ready- Mixed Concrete ASTM C94. Concrete ingredients proportioned by weight. Addition of water to mix shall be controlled by a Testing Laboratory representative. Concrete having a slump greater than five inches (5") is subject to being removed and replaced as required by the Engineer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
73-294 3603 11-03 3.01 PLACING CONCRETE A. Notify the Architect and Contractor's testing agency at least seventy-two (72) hours in advance, excluding Saturday and Sunday, before placing concrete. Dumping of waste concrete on site shall not be permitted. B. Preparation before placing: Remove hardened concrete and foreign materials from inner surfaces of conveying equipment. Form work shall have been completed. Remove ice and excess water. Secure reinforcement in place. Install expansion joint materials, anchors and other embedded items. C. Conveying: Handle concrete from mixer to place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable by methods which will prevent separation or loss of ingredients and in a manner which will assure that required quality of concrete is obtained. Conveying equipment shall be of size and design to insure a continuous flow of concrete at delivery end. Truck mixers, agitators and non- agitating units and their manner of operation shall conform to the applicable requirements of ASTM C94. Aluminum chutes or pipes for conveying concrete will not be permitted. D. Depositing Concrete: 1. General: Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, locate construction joints at points as provided for on the drawings or as approved. Maintain placing at such a rate that the concrete which is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic. Concrete which has partially hardened or has been contaminated by foreign materials shall not be deposited. Remove temporary spreaders in forms when the concrete placing has reached an elevation rendering their service unnecessary. They may remain embedded in the concrete only if made of metal or concrete, and if prior approval has been obtained. 2. Segregation: Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Do not subject concrete to any procedure which will cause segregation. Dropping concrete vertically more than five (5) feet (max. free fall distance) without an enclosed chute (tremie) will not be permitted. 3. Consolidation: Where a surface mortar is to be the basis of the finish, work the coarse aggregate back from the forms with a suitable tool to bring a full surface of mortar against forms, without formation of excessive surface voids. Consolidate all concrete by vibration, spading, rodding, or forking, in order that the concrete is thoroughly worked around the reinforcement, around embedded items and into corners of forms, eliminating all air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes or weakness. Mechanical vibrators shall have a minimum frequency of 7000 revolutions per minute and shall be operated by competent workmen. Over vibrating and use of vibrators to transport concrete within forms shall not be allowed. 4. Weather conditions: Unless adequate protection is provided and/or approval is obtained, concrete shall not placed during rain. Rain water shall not be allowed to increase the mixing water, or to damage the
74-294 3603 11-03 surface finish. When the mean daily temperature falls below 40°F., the minimum temperature of concrete as placed shall be 50°F. Concrete deposited in hot weather shall have a placing temperature which will not cause difficulty from loss of slump, flash set, or cold joints (usually somewhat less than 90°F.).
3.02 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS A. Removal: After forms have been removed, remove any concrete which is not formed as shown in drawings or which is not of alignment of level beyond required tolerances, or which shows defective surfaces which cannot be properly repaired or patched. B. Repairing and patching: Immediately patch all tie holes and all repairable defective areas after form removal. Remove all honeycombed and defective concrete to sound concrete, but in no case to a depth of less than 1". Dampen area to be patched and an area at least 6" wide surrounding same to prevent absorption of water from patching mortar. Mix and brush into defective surfaces a bond of neat Portland Cement and water, and some fine and passing a No. 30 mesh sieve. C. Make patching mixture of the same material and of approximately same portions as used for concrete, except omit coarse aggregate. Mortar shall consist of not more than one part cement to two and one-half parts sand by damp loose volume. Substitute white Portland Cement for a part of the gray Portland Cement on exposed concrete in order to produce a color matching color of the surrounding concrete, as determined by a trail patch. D. After surface water has evaporated from areas to be patched, bond coat shall be well brushed into surfaces. When the bond coat begins to lose water sheen, apply premixed patching mortar. Thoroughly consolidate mortar into place and strike off to leave patches slightly higher than surrounding surface. To permit initial shrinkage leave patches undisturbed for at least one hour before finally finishing. Keep patched areas damp for seven (7) days. Metal tools shall not be used in finishing a patch in the formed wall which will be exposed. E. Tie holes: After being cleaned and thoroughly dampened, tie holes shall be filled solid with patching mortar.
3.03 SITEWORK CONCRETE A. Concrete Paving: Concrete paving shall be six inches (6") thick placed on select fill specified elsewhere. Provide sealed control joints at 20 feet on center and one inch (1") expansion joints at 40 feet on center. Reinforce slabs with #4 bars twelve (12") inches on center each way. B. Concrete Walks: Concrete walks shall be four inches (4") thick concrete slab placed on compacted six (6") inches thick select fill. Provide tooled control joints and expansion joints as shown on drawings. Reinforce slabs with #3 and twelve (12") inches on center. C. Approach Slabs: Approach slabs shall be six inches (6") thick concrete slabs reinforced with #4 bars at twelve (12") inches on center each way. Place slab on compacted select fill.
75-294 3603 11-03 D. Curbs and Gutters: Curbs and gutters shall be as detailed with 1/2" expansion joints at forty (40') feet on center maximum and control joints at eight (8') feet on center.
3.04 CLEAN UP A. Upon completion of the work, remove forms, equipment, protection coverings any rubbish from the premises. Leave concrete surfaces and area in a clean and undamaged condition.
76-294 3603 11-03 03350 - FINISHING AND CURING CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Finishing, curing and protecting concrete surfaces.
1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03001, Formwork. B. Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS A. Membrane Curing Compound (for Membrane Curing): W.R. Meadows CS-305- 1315 and TIAH-1315 or equal to be used on exterior surfaces only. B. Absorptive Mats (for Water Curing): Burlap-polyethylene, minimum 8 oz./sq. yd. bonded to prevent separation during handling, placement curing. C. Polyethylene Film: 6 mils thick, clear. D. Water: Potable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FINISHING CONCRETE SLAB SURFACES, PADS, STAIRS, DRIVES, WALKS,CURBS, AND GUTTERS A. General: The dusting of wearing surfaces with dry materials WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. In preparation of finishing, strike slabs off true by double screeding to required levels at or below elevations or grades of finished slabs as indicated on drawings. Slabs shall be level. Maximum deviation in any one area shall be plus or minus 1/8" from elevations indicated on the Drawings. If leveling is required to bring floor to the required tolerance, this shall be accomplished by grinding down the high spots and filling the low spots using a approved concrete adhesive and concrete patching compound in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Finishes: 1. Trowel Finish: All interior concrete floor slabs, including exposed concrete floors, surfaces under carpet and resilient coverings and bases for mechanical equipment shall receive a trowel finish. Finish concrete slabs by tamping the concrete with special tools to force the coarse aggregate away from surfaces and then screed and float with straightedges to bring surfaces to required finish levels. While the concrete is still green but sufficiently hardened to bear a man's weight without deep imprint, wood-float to true planes with no coarse aggregate visible. Use sufficient pressure on wood floats to bring moisture to the surface. Then hand trowel to produce smooth impervious surfaces for the purpose of burnishing. 2. Final troweling shall produce a ringing sound from the trowel. Should this condition not be obtained in the original finish, high spots shall be ground
77-294 3603 11-03 down and low spots filled only in floor surfaces with coverings. Exposed concrete surfaces that are deficient shall be removed and replaced. 3. Wood float finish: All tops of footings and under ceramic tile, shall receive a wood float finish. Finish concrete by tamping the concrete with special tools to force the coarse aggregate away from the surface. Then screed and float with straightedges to bring surfaces to the required finish levels shown on drawings. While the concrete is still green but sufficiently hardened to bear a man's weight without deep imprint, wood float to true planes with no course aggregate visible. Use sufficient pressure on wood floats to bring the moisture to surface. Prior to final set of concrete, again wood float to a tight finish with a texture approved by the Architect. 4. Brush finish: Exterior concrete porches and walks, and areaway slabs shall receive a brushed finish. Finish concrete slabs by tamping concrete with a special tool to force course aggregate away from surface and then screed and float with straightedges to bring surface to required finish level shown on drawings. Edge and cross joint surfaces. As soon as surface of concrete is sufficiently hardened to bear a man's weight without deep imprint, wood float to a true plane with no coarse aggregate visible. After troweling, again edge and cross joint surfaces. Then brush with a soft fiber brush to produce uniformly straited surfaces. 5. Curbs and gutters: Shall receive a fine brush finish. Finish curb and flow lines with the use of a steel "S" shaped trowel to the contour of curb and gutter. Then cross brush curbs and gutters.
3.02 CURING A. General: Protect freshly deposited concrete from rain, premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for the period of time necessary for the hydration of cement and proper hardening of concrete. Initial curing shall immediately follow finishing operations. B. Duration of curing: Continue the final curing until the cumulative number of days or fractions thereof, not necessarily consecutive, during which temperature of the air in contact with the concrete is above 50°F. has totaled seven days. C. Water Curing 1. Ponding: Maintain 100% documented coverage of water over slabs continuously for seven (7) days. 2. Spraying: Spray water over interior building slabs and maintain wet for seven (7) days. 3. Absorptive Mat: Saturate burlap and place burlap-side down over building beams and walls, lapping ends and sides minimum 6 inch, and maintain in place for seven (7) days. 4. Polyethylene Film: Spread polyethylene film over interior or exterior slabs lapping edges and sides a minimum of 6 inches, maintain in place with pressure sensitive tape and plywood for seven (7) days. D. Membrane Curing for Exterior Concrete Slabs: 1. Apply membrane to all areas. 2. Curing exterior concrete, stair, porch, walk, curb and gutter surfaces: Immediately after finishing concrete surfaces, and the free surface moisture
78-294 3603 11-03 has disappeared, uniformly coat exposed surfaces with curing compound. Concrete shall not be allowed to dry out before application of membrane. If any drying has occurred, moisten surface of concrete with a fine spray of water. Apply curing compound to surfaces by means of a spraying machine as soon as free water has disappeared. Apply curing with an overlapping coverage of not more than 400 square feet per gallon for each coat. Apply second coat in a direction approximately at right angles to direction of first coat. Compound shall form a uniform, continuous, cohesive film that will not check, crack, or peel and that will be free from pinholes and other discontinuities.
3.03 PROTECTION A. Cold weather: When the mean daily temperature of the atmosphere is less than 40°F., maintain temperature of concrete between 50°F. and 70°F. for required curing period. B. Hot weather: When necessary, make adequate arrangements for installation of windbreak, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ponding, or wet covering or light cover in advance of placement to maintain required temperature and moisture conditions without injury due to concentration of heat. Concrete temperature shall not exceed 90°F. C. Excessive temperature changes: Changes in temperature of the concrete shall be as uniform as possible and shall not exceed 5°F. in any one hour or 50°F. in any 24 hour period. D. Whenever formwork is removed during the curing period, the exposed concrete shall be cured by one of the approved methods.
3.04 RUBBED FINISH A. Locations: Exposed concrete beam surfaces. B. Rubbed finish: Finish concrete surfaces in the following manner. Do all necessary patching immediately after forms have been removed. Wet surfaces and rub with a carborundum brick until a uniform color and texture are produced. No cement, grout or slush shall be used other than cement paste drawn from green concrete itself by rubbing process. Rub immediately after removal of forms and patching before concrete has completely hardened. C. Patching: Areas to be patched shall be approved by the Architect and shall not exceed two square feet for each 1000 square feet of surface area, and shall be widely dispersed. Patches shall be indistinguishable from surrounding areas. Before commencing any patching, the Contractor shall confirm patching procedures with the Architect and establish by trial mixes the formula for patching of finish. D. Mix: Mix all patching concrete with one volume of Portland Cement one and one-half to two volumes of sand and one and one-half to two volumes of gravel or crushed stone, 3/8". Use no more than 5 gallons of water per sack of cement. Machine mix concrete not less than 2 minutes. E. Application: Clean surfaces to receive patching. Apply a thick slurry of Portland Cement to structural concrete. Spread patching and screed and rod to true, uniform level and/or uniform sloped surfaces. Float surfaces to work finer particles of sand and cement to top. Trowel finish as specified.
79-294 3603 11-03
3.05 CLEAN UP A. Upon completion of the work, remove forms, protective coverings and any rubbish from the premises. Leave concrete surfaces in a clean and perfect condition.
80-294 3603 11-03 03450 - PRECAST CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Architectural precast concrete columns complete with connecting, supporting and hoisting devices.
1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03300 - Anchorage devices cast into cast-in-place concrete structure for architectural concrete units. B. Section 07900 - Perimeter joint sealant.
1.03 MANUFACTURER AND ERECTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer, Transportation, and Installation: By company specializing in providing architectural precast products and services normally associated with precast concrete construction with high quality finishes. B. Welders: AWS D1.1 qualified.
1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Design architectural precast concrete units in accordance with ACI 318. B. Design architectural concrete units under direct supervision of registered Professional Engineer fully experienced in design of precast concrete structural units. C. Design precast concrete units to support required live and dead loads. D. Design precast concrete units and component connections to withstand weight of, and forces subjected to precast concrete units. Design to provide for foundation settlement and building movement. Provide adjustment connections to accommodate misalignment of structure. E. Design precast concrete units and connections to accommodate, by means of expansion joints, movement in structure and between cladding elements and structure without permanent distortion, damage to components, wrecking of joint connections, or breakage of seals. F. Manufacture precast concrete units to ensure similarity of dimension and finish throughout. G. Submit to Architect/Engineer for review, deviation in design or dimensions required.
1.05 TESTING A. Testing: By independent firm appointed and paid for by manufacturer. Submit name of firm to Architect/Engineer for review. B. Make one compression test at 28 days for each day's production of each type of concrete. 1. Provide two test specimens for each compression test. 2. Obtain concrete for specimens from actual production batch. 3. 4 inch (102 mm) sized concrete cube. 4. Cure specimens using same methods used for precast concrete units until units are stripped, then moist cure specimens until test.
81-294 3603 11-03
C. Make water absorption test of coarse aggregates according to ASTM C127 and of fine aggregates according to ASTM C128. D. Submit test results to Architect/Engineer for review.
1.06 SAMPLES A. Submit 12" x 12" precast concrete samples, representative of proposed finish, texture and color. Approved sample shall serve as the standard for quality, color and texture. B. Accepted sample unit establishes minimum standard of quality and workmanship for architectural precast concrete work.
1.07 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. This reference standard includes other ASTM material standards. B. ASTM C127 - Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate. C. ASTM C128 - Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate.
1.08 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340. B. Indicate unit locations, unit identification marks, fabrication details, reinforcement, connection details, pertinent dimensions, and erection support points. Unit identification marks: Appear on manufactured units. C. Provide copies of design calculations for reinforcing, hoisting and connection and anchorage devices, for Architect/Engineer's review. D. Do not proceed with fabrication until shop drawings have been approved.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle precast units in positions consistent with their shape and design. Do lifting and supporting only from support points indicated on shop drawings. B. Embedded lifting or handling devices: Capable of supporting units in positions anticipated during manufacture, storage, transportation and erection. C. Block and laterally brace precast units during transport and while stored on site. Provide lateral bracing sufficient to prevent bowing and warping. Blocking and bracing: Clean, non-staining and not prevent uniform curing of exposed surfaces. D. Provide edges of units with adequate protection to prevent staining, chipping or spalling of concrete. Damaged panels will be rejected.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials: ACI 318, ASTM Specifications. B. Provide concrete of following strength. 1. Compressive strength 28 day: 5000 psi. C. Cement: White Portland Cement, a minimum of 6-1/2 sacks per cubic yard of concrete mix. D. Fine Aggregates: Refer to Section 03300 for aggregate requirements.
82-294 3603 11-03
E. Coarse Aggregates: Refer to Section 03300 for aggregate requirements. F. Facing Stone: San Saba Marble #1, 0-00 fines. Exposed shall be white and lightly sandblasted. G. Reinforcing: Refer to Section 03200.
2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Connecting and Supporting Devices: ASTM A36. B. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Corrosion resistant chromium nickel type.
2.03 FABRICATION A. Finish: All exposed, finished surfaces shall be straight and true and of an even color and texture B. Panels: Panels shall consist of a mixture to two and one-half (2-1/2) parts concrete aggregate to one (1) part Portland cement with a water cement ratio not to exceed five (5) gallons of water per sack of cement. The panels shall have compressive strength of not less than 5000 psi at twenty-eight (28) days of age. Moisture absorption shall not exceed eight (8) percent when tested in accordance with ASTM Designation C97. Panels shall be cast in accurate molds that will withstand high frequency vibrations without distortion. Vibration shall be continuous during casting, until full thickness of panel is reached. Panels shall be manufactured by approved firm having a minimum of five years experience with concrete precast production similar to this project. Panel shapes shall be as indicated on the drawings with surfaces to match sample panels. C. Maintain plant records and quality control program during production of precast concrete units. Make records available to Architect/Engineer upon request. D. Use molds which are rigid and constructed of material that will result in uniform finished products. E. Establish concrete mix design(s) by tests on trial batches to achieve specified strengths. Maintain water content as constant as possible during manufacture. Mix in admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure that consistent quantities of pigment are used. F. Deposit and vibrate concrete to ensure proper consolidation, elimination of unintentional cold joints, and to minimize entrapped air on vertical surfaces. G. Fabricate required connecting devices, plates, angles, items fit to steel framing members, inserts, bolts and accessories. Fabricate to allow units to be securely held in place of final installation and adjusted prior to permanent locking in place. H. Locate hoisting devices so that they are not visible when unit is installed. I. Ensure reinforcing steel, anchors, inserts, plates, angles, and other cast-in items are sufficiently embedded and properly located. J. Prime paint all surfaces of connecting and supporting devices except those embedded in concrete or requiring field welding. Shop prime in two (2) coats. Thoroughly clean all surfaces of rust, scale grease and foreign matter prior to prime painting.
83-294 3603 11-03 K. Ensure finished surfaces of precast concrete units are uniform, and match accepted sample unit. L. Cure units under near identical conditions to develop concrete quality, and minimize appearance blemishes such as non-uniformity, staining, or surface cracking. M. Waterproofing: One (1) coat of three (3) percent silicone waterproofing shall be applied to the face of all panels before delivery to the jobsite.
2.04 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES A. Design for and maintain following tolerances: 1. Thickness: Plus or minus 1/8 inch. 2. Maximum out of square: 1/8 inch per 10 feet (3m). 3. Maximum bowing: Length of bow / 360. 4. Location of items cast in: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.
2.05 PATCHING A. Minor patching in plant: Acceptable providing structural adequacy and appearance of units is not impaired.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ERECTION A. Provide for erection procedures, temporary bracing and induced loads during erection. Maintain temporary bracing in place until final support is provided. B. Provide necessary hoisting equipment. C. Erect units without damage to shape or finish. Replace or repair damaged panels, or repair to Architect's satisfaction. Repair or replacement shall be at Architect's discretion. D. Erect units level, plumb, square, and true within allowable tolerances. Align and maintain uniform horizontal and vertical joints, as erection progresses. E. Securely fasten units in place by welding. F. Touch-up field welds and damaged prime painted surfaces.
3.02 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES A. Maintain following joint tolerances of erected precast concrete units: 1. Face width of joint: Plus or minus 1/8 inch. 2. Step in face: Maximum 1/16 inch. 3. Job alignment of edges: Maximum 1/8 inch.
3.03 REPAIR A. Repair or replace damaged units. Repair is acceptable if structural integrity is maintained and appearance is not impaired. The Architect shall determine if appearance damage warrants replacement or if repair is adequate.
3.04 CLEANING A. Clean weld marks or other marks, debris or dirt from exposed surfaces of units.
84-294 3603 11-03 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04400 - STONE WORK
04400:01 - SCOPE A. Work included: 1. Includes construction of all stone and masonry work, complete with ties, anchors and all incidentals necessary to complete the work in this section. 2. Includes providing for installation of materials specified or necessary under other sections of the work which are to be built into the work of this section.
B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Sheathing: Section 06113. 2. Wall Flashing: Section 07700. 3. Exterior Dampproofing: Section 07170. 4. Caulking and Sealants: Section 07951.
C. General: 1. Foreman: Provide thoroughly competent foreman. 2. Scaffolding: Provide necessary scaffolding, adequate and safe, in accordance with all local laws and ordinances. Maintain during construction and remove after completion. 3. Protection: During erection, keep exposed walls dry by covering at end of each day or shutdown period with canvas or waterproof paper and boards. 4. Freezing Weather: Do not lay masonry in freezing weather or when temperature is likely to go below freezing within 24 hours. 5. Storage of Materials: a. Store masonry cement on site in watertight shed with floor well off the ground. b. Masonry shall be stacked on planks off the ground and in wet weather shall be covered with tarpaulins or otherwise kept dry.
04400:02 - MATERIALS: A. Masonry: Submit samples for approval. 1. Concrete Block: a. Concrete Block shall be Haydite Masonry Units ASTM C 129-52 as manufactured by Texas Industries, Featherlite or equal. b. Block insulation in concrete block in exterior walls shall be equal to “Korfil” as manufactured by Concrete Block Insulating Systems, 508-867-4241, FAX: 508- 867-5702. 2. Stone: a. Stone shall be native Texas limestone. b. Contractor shall submit samples for approval. c. Approved Suppliers: 1. Texas Stone Quarries, Garden City, Texas. 2. Marx Building Stone, Leander, Texas. d. Stone shall be split-face and sawed-face finish, laid in a coursed ashlar running bond. Size of coursing indicated on Drawings. All pieces shall have a thickness of 4 inches.
85-294 3603 11-03 e. Lay a sample wall panel for approval. 2. Granite - Yard Sign: a. Granite to be Texas Pink Granite. b. Submit samples for approval. c. Granite to be fabricated as indicated on Drawings. d. Approved Suppliers: (1) Cold Spring Granite Co., Marble Falls, Texas. (2) Capitol Marble and Granite, Marble Falls, Texas. B. Mortar: 1. Masonry Cement: Shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C270, Type “N”. 2. Sand: Clean, hard, sharp, siliceous, free from loam, silt, or other matter. Use white Portland Cement at stone. 3. Water: Shall be clean and free from deleterious amounts of acid, alkalis, or organic materials. 4. Proportions (by volume), 750 psi min. Strength: a. One part masonry cement or white Portland cement. b. Not less than 2 1/4 or more than 3 parts sand measured in a damp loose condition. 5. Mixing: a. Mix only sufficient mortar to supply immediate requirements. No re-tempering permitted after mortar has set. b. Mix by mechanical means if possible. c. Keep proportions consistent. C. Accessories: 1. Corrugated Masonry Strap Anchors: 16 Ga. Galvanized steel equal to No. 260 as manufactured by Heckmann Building Products, www.heckmannbuildingprods.com. 2. Joint reinforcement: Zinc-Coated Truss Design standard weight “Dur-O-Wall” spaced not more than 16" o.c. horizontally, width slightly less than width of wall. 3. Flexible anchors: No. 315 weld on anchor rods with No. 316 triangle ties, Size as required. As manufactured by Heckmann Building Products. 4. Channel Slot System: No. 133 Long-type Channel Slot with No. 135 anchor into concrete block with 129 channel slot triangle ties, size as required. As manufactured by Heckmann Building Products.
04400:03 METHODS A. General: 1. No masonry will be placed in freezing weather. 2. All masonry work shall be laid true to dimensions, plumb, square and in bond and properly anchored, with vertical joints in line plumb and true. 3. Provision shall be made for all special units, corners, fillers, etc., as may be required to maintain proper bond. 4. Building ground and nailing blocks as required and where directed. 5. Form chases, slots, etc., and patch masonry work as required for all trades. B. Unit Masonry: 1. Lay block with 3/8" head and bed joints. Lay units in full beds of mortar. Shove into mortar. Obtain full head joints by applying full bed of mortar on entire end of each unit, then shoving block tightly against units already in place. 2. Bond or tie with continuous wall reinforcing all intersections of wall and partitions. 3. Cut masonry units with carborundum saw.
86-294 3603 11-03 4. All masonry units shall be from the same plant respectively. Color and texture difference will not be approved. C. Stone: 1. Lay in a coursed ashlar running bond with vertical dimensions as detailed. 2. All stone shall be from the same source respectively. Color and texture shall be as approved by Architect. 3. Stone shall be laid in an approved pattern with ½" bed and head joints. Joints to be troweled flush. 4. Stone wall ties shall be spaced not over 16" horizontally and 24" vertically. D. Expansion: 1. See drawings for locations and types.
04400:04 - CLEANING A. At completion of all stone work, all sight-exposed stone walls should be thoroughly cleaned and washed down with clean water and a stiff bristled brush. No acid of any kind shall be used in the cleaning process.
87-294 3603 11-03 DIVISION 5 - METALS
05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The fabrication, delivery and erection of all items of structural steel complete including: 1. Anchors, bolts and miscellaneous fasteners. 2. Shop painting and field touch-up painting. 3. Furnishing to other trades anchorage portions and templates for items or work included in this Section. 4. Furnish and install all hangers, sleeves, rods, bars, plates, bolts, nuts, screws, anchors, brackets, welds, lugs, etc., as may be required to complete the work of the Section and to join the work of other trades. 5. Do all bracing, blocking, cutting, fitting, drilling, tapping, etc., as may be required to complete the work of this Section and to join the work of the trades. 6. Shop Drawings. 7. Grouting of base and bearing plates. 8. Laboratory and field inspection.
1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 05200 – Steel Joints. B. Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metals. B. Section 09900 - Painting.
1.03 REFERENCES A. Unless otherwise indicated the AISC Specifications for The Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, latest edition, with supplements, and CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE FOR STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES as adopted by AISC, latest edition, shall govern the work. Welding shall be in accordance with American Welding Society Standard Code D1.1, latest edition. B. Design: Design of structural steel members and connections for any portion of the structure not indicated on the contract drawings, shall be indicated on the shop drawings by the fabricator. C. Substitutions: Substitutions of sections, or modifications of details, or both, and the reasons therefore, shall be submitted with the shop drawings for approval. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for all errors of detailing, fabrication, and for the correct fitting of members. Any details not indicated on the contract drawings shall be completed by the fabricator and indicated on the shop drawings. E. Verify conditions in the field by measurements as required for work fabricated to fit job conditions. Before starting work, examine adjoining work on which items may in any way be dependent for perfect fit. Report any defects in writing to the Architect prior to starting of work. F. Templates: Shall be furnished by the Contractor.
88-294 3603 11-03 G. Qualification of Welders: Before assigning any welder to work covered by this Section of the Specifications, the names of the welders to be employed on the work together with certification that each of these welders have passed qualification tests using procedures covered in the American Welding Society Standard D1.1, latest edition should be available to the Architect upon request. Welders shall have passed the qualification test within the preceding 12 month period.
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340. B. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, connections, attachments, fasteners, combers, and erection plans. C. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. D. Furnish mill test reports on all steel furnished on this project. Certification of materials as being same as described by mill test report is required of the Testing Laboratory.
1.05 INSPECTION A. Testing and inspection in conjunction with structural steel shall be conducted by the testing agency employed and paid by the Contractor. Reports of all tests and inspection shall be forwarded to Architect, Structural Engineer, and the Contractor. Reports of tests shall state whether or not tests and inspection conform with contract requirements. The testing laboratory shall inspect all connections and report condition of completed structure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be of domestic manufacture and shall conform to the respective specifications (latest revision) and other requirements specified below: 1. Bolts and Nuts: Bolts and nuts, other than those with self-locking screw threads, shall be the American National coarse-thread series. 2. Unfinished Bolts and Nuts: Unfinished bolts and nuts shall conform to ASTM Standard A-307 and shall be the regular hexagon-bolt types. Use for anchor bolts and connection of structural steel to concrete where shown on Drawings. 3. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A-307, Grade A or High Strength as noted on the Drawings. 4. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A-325. 5. Steel: Shall conform to ASTM A-36. 6. Tube Columns: Shall conform to ASTM A500, Grade B. 7. Welding Electrodes: Electrodes and welding rods shall be Low Hydrogen Shielded arc types (E70 Series) and shall show good welding qualities in flat, vertical and overhead positions. 8. Paint: Tnemec 10-99. 9. Grout: Master Builders No. LL-713 non shrink, non stain, pre-mix grout or approved equal.
89-294 3603 11-03 2.02 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop Drawings shall include all shop and erection details, cuts, copes, connections, holes, bolts, and welds in structural steel. Indicate all welds, both shop and field, by standard welding symbols in the American Welding Society Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction. Drawings shall show the size, length, type of each weld and paint.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FABRICATION A. Fabricate and assemble materials in shop to greatest extent possible. Shearing, flame cutting, and chipping shall be done carefully and accurately. B. Connections: 1. Connections not indicated on the contract drawings shall be made to conform with the AISC Specification for the "Design Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings". Shop connections shall be bolted or welded or bolted with ASTM A 325 bolts after obtaining approval from the Architect. 2. Include supplementary parts necessary to complete each item, though work is not definitely shown or specified. Furnish to the appropriate trades all anchors, socket or fastenings required for securing work to other construction. C. Holes: Cut, drill, or punch at right angles to surface of metal. Do not make or enlarge by burning. Holes shall be clean-cut without torn or ragged edges. Provide holes in members to permit connecting work of other trades as indicated on approved shop drawings. D. Compression Joints: Depending upon contact bearing, shall have bearing surfaces truly faced. Remaining joints shall be butt or dressed straight and true. E. Bolting: Drive bolts accurately into holes without damaging threads. Protect bolt heads from damage during driving. Bolt heads and nuts shall rest squarely against metal. High strength bolting shall conform to AISC Specifications for "Structural Joints Using ASTM A-325 Bolts". F. Workmanship: Insofar as possible fit and shop assemble members, ready for erection. Execute work in accordance with details shown on contract drawings and approved shop drawings. Accurately and tightly fit jointings and intersections of metals with adequate fastenings. Tack welding will not be permitted on exposed surfaces. Grind exposed welds smooth. Provide holes and connections for the work of other trades.
3.02 PAINTING A. Structural steel shall be given a shop coat of material specified by dipping, spraying or brushing. Final dry film thickness shall be not less than 1.5 mils. After erection, touch up abraded and unpainted surfaces. Remove mud and other firmly attached and objectionable foreign materials before general field touch-up painting is done.
3.03 ERECTION A. General: Make field connections by bolting or welding as noted on drawings. B. Anchor bolts and anchors: Locate properly and build into connecting work. C. Field assembly: Shall conform to the AISC Specifications listed in References.
90-294 3603 11-03 1. As the erection progresses securely bolt steel members to take care of all dead loads, wind and erection stresses. Provide and maintain adequate temporary bracing during all erection procedures until work is permanently connected and installed, including grouting. Wherever piles of material, erection equipment or other loads are carried during erection, make proper provisions to take care of stresses resulting from same. 2. No members shall be spliced without prior approval of the Architect. No cutting of sections, flanges, webs or angles shall be done without the approval of the Architect. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush.
3.04 GROUTING STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Chip away defective concrete and laitance, leaving surfaces of concrete reasonably rough but level. Remove oil, grease, dirt and loose material from bottoms of plates and bolts. Mix grout in strict conformity with manufacturer's directions. Place grout from one side only to avoid entrapping air. Move flexible steel strapping back and forth through grout to help flow of grout into place. After grout has hardened, cut back unconfined edges of grout and slope at 45 degree angle with plates.
3.05 CLEAN UP A. Clean up all debris caused by work of this section, keeping the premises clean and neat at all times.
91-294 3603 11-03 05400 – LIGHT GAGE METAL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Extent of light gage framing is shown on drawings. B. Types of light gage metal framing units include the following: "C" shaped steel studs.
1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. B. Section 04400 – Stonework. C. Section 05120 - Structural Steel. D. Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metals.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Component Design: Compute structural properties of studs and joists in accordance with AISC "Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." B. Fire Rated Assemblies: Where framing units are components of assemblies indicated for a fire-resistance rating, including those required for compliance with governing regulation, provide units which have been approved by governing authorities having jurisdiction. C. Manufacturer: Provide light gage metal framing components of type(s) indicated, produced by one of the following in Paragraph D. D. Manufacturers: Manufacturers offering products complying with requirements for light gage metal framing components include the following: 1. Southwest Metals, Inc. 2. United States Gypsum Corporation. 3. Marino Ware, A Division of Ware Industries, Inc.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product information and installation instructions for each item of light gage framing and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings for all components and installations. 2. Include placing drawings for framing members showing size and gauge designations, number, type, location and spacing. Indicate supplemental strapping, splices, accessories, and details required for proper installation.
1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Protect metal framing units from rusting and damage. Deliver to project site in manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, brand, type and grade. Store off ground in a dry ventilated space or protect with suitable waterproof coverings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
92-294 3603 11-03
2.01 METAL FRAMING A. System Components: 1. With each type of metal framing required, provide manufacturer's standard steel runners (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements, fasteners, and accessories as recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated, as needed to provide a complete metal framing system. B. Materials and Finishes: 1. For 16 gauge and heavier units, fabricate metal framing components of structural quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 50,000 psi; ASTM A570-75. 2. All components shall be galvanized. 3. "C" Shape Studs: Manufacturer's standard load bearing steel studs of size, shape and gauge as indicated on the Contract Drawings, meeting the minimum physical properties of the members specified.
2.02 FABRICATION A. General: Framing components may be prefabricated into panels prior to erection. Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line and braced against racking with joints welded. Perform lifting of prefabricated panels in a manner to prevent damage or distortion. B. Fastenings: 1. Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by welding, bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with manufacturer. 2. Wire tying of framing components is not permitted.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install metal framing systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed or written instructions and recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. B. Runner Tracks: Install continuous tracks as detailed on the drawings. Align tracks accurately to layout at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as specified in the metal stud details on the Contract Drawings. C. Plumb Studs: Set studs plumb except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Supplemental Framing: Install supplemental framing, blocking and bracing in metal framing system wherever walls or partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim and furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to the wall or partition. Where type of supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or loading resulting from items supported. E. Installation of Wall Stud System: Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by welding at both inside and outside flanges.
93-294 3603 11-03 F. Frame Wall Openings: Frame wall openings larger than 2'-0" square with double stud at each jamb of frame except where more than 2 are either shown or indicated in manufacturer's instructions or on the Contract Drawings. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs by welding, and space jack studs same as full height studs of wall. Secure stud system wall opening frame in manner indicated. G. Expansion Joints: Frame both sides of expansion and control joints, as shown for wall system, with a separate stud and do not bridge the joint with components of stud system. H. Bridging: Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced (vertical distance) at not more than 4'-6" on center. Weld at each intersection of studs. I. Field Painting: Touch up shop applied protective coatings damaged during handling and installation. Use compatible primer for prime coated surface.
94-294 3603 11-03 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METAL
05500:01 – SCOPE A. Furnish and install all items necessary to complete this work.
05500:02 - SUBMITTAL A. Furnish to Architect for approval six (6) copies of details of construction, installation, and finishes of fabricated items. B. Furnish to Architect for approval manufacturer's literature of all manufactured items.
05500:03 - MATERIALS: A. Structural Sections shall conform to all requirements of ASTM A-36. Sections must be clean and free from twists and bends.
05500:04 - FABRICATION A. Fabrication: The Plans indicate the design and arrangement of fabricated items. Dimensions scaled from the plans shall not be used for fabrication and the Contractor shall, when necessary, determine actual dimensions at the building. 1. Workmanship: Shall be equal to best practice in modern steel shops. 2. Materials: Shall be clean and straight. If flattening or straightening is necessary, it shall be done in such a manner as not to injure or weaken the material. Shop kinks or bends will not be permitted. 3. Exposed Steel: Where in view, shall be considered as "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel," and shall conform to the requirements of Section 5, page 187, AISC Manual, latest edition. B. Welding: Materials used and details of all welded joints shall meet the requirements of the American Welding Society Code for arc welding in building constructions. C. Shop Painting: Provide one shop coat of rust-inhibitive zinc chromate paint or approved equal, prior to delivery. Do not shop paint items hot dip galvanized.
05500:05 - INSTALLATION A. Location: Refer to Drawings. B. General: All items shall be installed according to details and manufacturer's recommendations.
95-294 3603 11-03 DIVISION 6 - CARPENTRY
06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber Grading Rules and Wood Species in accordance with PS 20. B. Grade Marks: 1. Identify lumber and plywood by official grade mark. 2. Lumber: a. Grade mark to contain symbol of grading agency certified by Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, mill number of name, grade of lumber, species or species grouping or combination designation, rules under which graded where applicable and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture. b. S - GRN: Unseasoned. c. S - Dry: 19% maximum moisture content. d. MC-15 or KD: 15% maximum moisture content. e. Dense. 3. Softwood Plywood: Conform to PS-1. 4. Pressure Treated Materials: Conform to AWPA Standards. 5. Fire Retardant Treated Materials: Bear U.L. label FR-S.
1.02 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials minimum 6" above ground on framework or blocking and cover with protective waterproof covering providing for adequate air circulation. B. Do not store seasoned or treated materials in damp location. C. Protect edges of sheet materials from damage to corners.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS A. Lumber: 1. Dimensions indicated are nominal; actual dimensions to conform to PS 20. 2. Surfacing: Surfaced four sides (S4S) unless noted otherwise. 3. End Jointed Lumber: Structural purposes interchangeable with sawn lumber; glued joints of load bearing lumber in accordance with PS 36. 4. Framing Lumber: Any commercial softwood species. a. Light Framing: (1) General framing: No. 1 Southern Yellow Pine. (2) Bracing, blocking and general purposes: Economy Grade. B. Plywood: Exterior Grade where edge or surface is permanently exposed weather. C. Pressure Treated Products: In accordance with AWPA Standard C2 for above ground application.
96-294 3603 11-03 D. Fire-retardant treated products: 1. Lumber: AWPA Standard C-20. 2. Plywood: AWPA Standard C-27. E. Hardware: 1. Bolts: FS FF-B-575. 2. Nuts: FS FF-N-836. 3. Expansion shields and lag screws and bolts: FS FF-B-561. 4. Wood Screws: FS FF-S-111. 5. Nails: FS FF-N-105.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION A. Framing: 1. Accurately saw-cut lumber to seat square on bearings. Fit closely into proper location, true to line and grade, plumb and level. 2. Frame, anchor, tie and brace members to develop strength and rigidity required for purpose for which they are to be used. Do not stress members in excess of design strength. 3. Secure members permanently in position with proper fastenings to render parts rigid. 4. Provide scaffolding and temporary enclosures, partitions, stairs and protective covers as required. B. Blocking and Furring: 1. Provide wood blocking, nailers, ground, furring, etc. as required for securing work of other trades. 2. Shape, install and secure work properly to receive, engage or support other work. C. Pressure treated products: Provide where wood comes in contact with concrete, masonry or roofing. After erection, field treat cuts and holes with swabbing of concentrated solution of same preservative as originally applied in accordance with AWPA Standard M4. D. Hardware: 1. Furnish and install nails, screws, bolts, anchors, washers, clips, shields and other rough hardware necessary to complete work. 2. Bore holes for bolts true to line and of same diameter as bolts. Drive bolts into place with a tight fit; provide plates or washers where bolt heads or nuts are in contact with wood.
97-294 3603 11-03 06113 - SHEATHING
06113:01 - SCOPE A. Work Included: Furnish all materials and install wall and roof sheathing complete with all incidentals necessary to complete the work. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 2. Lathing: Section 09110. 3. Plaster: Section 09180.
06113:02 - MATERIALS A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Equal to EXT-APA Sheathing, 24/0, ½" thickness. B. Plywood Roof Sheathing: equal to EXT-APA Sheathing, 32/16, 5/8" thickness. C. Fasteners: 1 1/4" Type W Screws as manufactured by United States Gypsum. D. No. 15 Asphalt Felt.
06113:03 - INSTALLATION A. Apply wall sheathing horizontally and secure with screws. Attach to exterior of each stud vertically. Screws (size and type as recommended by manufacturer) spaced 3/8" from ends and edges and approximately 7" o.c. B. Apply Roof Sheathing with the long dimension across the supports. Fasten sheathing as recommended by manufacturer. C. Apply sealant around sheathing perimeter at interface with other materials and install flashing as indicated on the Drawings. D. Install asphalt felt horizontally with 2" overlap and 6" end lap and fasten with corrosion- resistant staples as specified. Cut back felt ½" on each side of break in supporting members where control joints will be located.
98-294 3603 11-03 06180 – GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glue laminated wood beams. B. Preservative treatment of wood. C. Connecting bolts.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05120: Prefabricated steel structural supports. B. Section 06112 – Framing and Sheathing: Roof sheathing. C. Section 09900 – Painting: Field finishing.
1.03 REFERENCES A. AITC (American Institute of Timber Construction). B. ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee). C. ANSI A190 1 – Structural Glued Laminated Timber. D. APA/EWS – American Plywood Association – Engineered Wood Systems. E. ASTM A36/A36M – Structural Steel. F. ASTM A167 – Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. G. ASTM D2559 – Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for Use Under Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure Conditions. H. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association). I. AWS D1.1 – Structural Welding Code.
1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENT A. Design and laminated members to AITC 117 Standard.
1.05 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01300 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials, application technique and resultant performance information. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate framing system, sizes and spacing of members, loads and cambers, bearing and anchor details, bridging and bracing, and framed openings.
1.06 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Section 01300 – Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Submit design calculations.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer/Fabricator: Company specializing in manufacture of glue laminated structural units with three (3) years experience, and certified by AITC in accordance with ANSI A190.1.
99-294 3603 11-03 B. Erector: Company specializing in erection of this Work with five years experience. C. Design structural members under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas. D. Perform welding Work in accordance with AWS D1.1.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Section 01600 – Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. B. Protect members to AITC requirements for individually wrapped. C. Leave individual wrapping in place until finishing occurs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS A. Lumber: Southern Yellow Pine or Douglas Fir lumber with 12 percent maximum moisture content before fabrication. Design for the following values: 1. Bending (Fb): 2,400 psi. 2. Tension Parallel to Grain (Ft): 1,100 psi. 3. Compression Parallel to Grain (Fc): 1,650 psi. 4. Compression Perpendicular to Grain Bottom (Fc1): 1,700 psi. 5. Compression Perpendicular to Grain Top (Fc1): 1,700 psi. 6. Horizontal Shear (Fv): 200 psi. 7. Modulus of Elasticity (E): 1,800,000 psi. B. Steel Connections and Brackets: ASTM A36 weldable quality, primer components. C. Steel Connections and Brackets: ASTM A167, Type 304 stainless steel. D. Hardware: ASTM A325, structural quality steel, prime components. E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A325 steel. F. Laminating Adhesive: AITC A190.1 for wet conditions of service. G. Wood Sealer: As recommended by manufacturer. H. Metal Primer: Tnemec 10-99.
2.02 WOOD TREATMENT A. Wood Preservation (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C2 using water borne preservative with 0.40 percent retainage. B. Shop treat wood materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate glue laminated structural members in accordance with AITC Architectural grade. B. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication. C. Cut and fit members accurately to length to achieve tight joint fit. D. Fabricate member with camber built in. E. Do not splice or join members in locations other than those indicated without permission.
100-294 3603 11-03
F. Fabricate steel hardware and connections with joints neatly fitted, welded, and ground smooth. G. After end trimming, seal with penetrating sealer in accordance with AITC requirements. H. Field Finishing of Members: Specified in Section 09900.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that supports are ready to receive units. B. Verify sufficient end bearing area.
3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of support items.
3.03 ERECTION A. Lift members using protection straps to prevent visible damage. B. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct positions or sloped where indicated. C. Provide temporary bracing and anchorage to hold members in place until permanently secured. D. Fit members together accurately without trimming, cutting, or other unauthorized modification. E. Swab and seal the interior wood surfaces of field drilled holes in members with primer.
3.04 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: ½ inch ± maximum from true position.
101-294 3603 11-03 06192 – FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDES A. Fabricate, supply and erect wood trusses and plywood web, wood of flanges, I section wood joists. B. Steel connectors and gussets, primed. C. Lateral support trusses, and truss joists.
1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry, wood blocking, curbing, and miscellaneous framing.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber used in the manufacture of trusses, grade stamp clearly visible, indicating conformance with NFPA. B. Truss joists shall conform to Truss Joist I Series fabrication and erection requirement.
1.04 REFERENCES A. MIL-V-13518(1) – Wood Preservative: Tetrachlorophenol and Pentachlorophenol, Surface Sealing Compound. B. PS 1 – Construction and Industrial Plywood. C. PS 20 – American Softwood Lumber Standard. D. NFPA National Forest Products Association – National Design Specification for Stress Grade Lumber and Its Fastening. E. ASTM A90 – Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles. F. ASTM A36 – Structural Steel.
1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings prior to fabrication in accordance with Section 01340. Shop drawings shall submit design calculations for all trusses. B. Indicate truss and truss joist framing plants; species and grades of lumber used; design loading and allowable stress increase; force analysis of each member; pitch, span and spacing of trusses; gauge thickness, nominal sizes and locations of connectors at joists; bearing and anchorage details; framed openings; permanent bracing and bridging. C. Shop drawings to bear seal of Professional Engineer, registered in Texas. D. Submit manufacturer’s instructions on lateral bracing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS A. Wood Chords and Webs: PS 20, graded to NFPA rules, Southern Pine No. 1 Structural grade, maximum moisture content of 15% or as approved by Engineer.
102-294 3603 11-03
B. Plates: 20 gauge galvanized sheet steel, minimum yield strength of 33 ksi, minimum ultimate tensile strength of 48 ksi, 1.25 oz. zinc coating: ASTM A90. C. Primer: Standard with manufacturer. D. Wood Preservative: Pentachlorophenol water repellant type. E. Lateral Support: Recommended by truss manufacturer’s engineer.
2.02 FABRICATION A. Ensure members are accurately cut to length, angle and true to line to ensure tight joints. B. Shop apply primer to connectors and gussets. Allow to dry thoroughly before installing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ERECTION A. Set and secure wood trusses level, plumb, and in correct locations. Set truss joists as shown on Drawings. B. Provide temporary bracing and anchorage to hold trusses in place until permanently secured. C. Ensure truss ends have sufficient bearing area. D. Install permanent bracing and bridging prior to application of leads. E. Cutting and altering of members is not permitted.
103-294 3603 11-03 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY
06200:01 – SCOPE A. Work Included: Erection of wall finish materials, installation of hardware, doors, and incidentals necessary to complete Finish Carpentry Work. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Finish Hardware: Section 08700. 2. Gypsum Drywall System: Section 09260. 3. Wood Doors: Section 08200. 4. Toilet Accessories: Section 10800.
06200:02 - GENERAL A. Experience: Provide experienced and capable foreman and mechanics. B. Inspection: Inspect finish materials, trims, doors, etc., to insure that no sub- grade, defective or machine marked pieces are installed. C. Priming and Back-painting: Arrange to have all doors and other work equipment primed and back-painted immediately upon delivery to building. D. Nailing 1. Interior wood trim less 4": 6d casing nails not more than 12" o.c., staggered. 2. Interior wood trim 4" or wider: 2 - 6d casing nails 12" o.c. 3. Exterior wood trim less than 4": 8d casing nails 12" o.c. 4. Exterior wood trim 4" to 6" wide: 2 - 8d casing nails 12" o.c. 5. Exterior wood trim wider than 6": 3 - 8d casing nails 12" o.c.
06200:03 - MATERIALS A. Interior Trim: Birch or approved equal. B. Interior plywood paneling: Birch or approved equal.
06200:04 - INSTALLATION A. Workmanship Standards: Shall be of such grade as will bring results of first class only, and performed by skilled mechanics. B. Installation of Finish Hardware: 1. Installation: a. Check markings on hardware items for proper location. b. The supplier will mark each item of hardware for location. Protect the markings until each item is installed. If any item of hardware is delivered to the job not properly marked, return it to the supplier for marking before attempting to install it. c. Install and make necessary adjustments for proper working order. d. Any hardware damaged by improper adjustment or careless abuse will be replaced by this Contractor at his expense. e. Fit all surface applied surface hardware accurately. f. Provide clean, properly sized and accurately placed mortises for all mortise hardware such as lock sets, flush bolts, etc. g. After hardware is installed, protect exposed surfaces from wear and abuse by the use of heavy paper and masking tape and maintain until job completion. 2. Removal for Painting: Remove all hardware except that which is primed
104-294 3603 11-03 for painting before painter's finish is applied and permanently re-adjust for proper function, after finish has been completed and dried hard. C. Toilet Accessories: 1. Accurately fitted in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions to the satisfaction of the Architect. D. Protection and Field Fitting of Wood Doors: 1. Conform to requirements of "Handling, Job finishing and Instructions" as written by the National Woodwork Manufacturers Association (NWMA). E. Doors and other movable wood parts shall be accurately fitted with proper clearances and left in perfectly working order. All refitting necessary due to swelling, shrinking, faulty assembly, or installation shall be done by the Contractor, without cost to Owner, for a period of one year after completion and acceptance of the building. When dressing or cutting has been done, these surfaces shall be repainted or varnished. The work shall be left clean and free from warp, twist, open joints, or other defects.
105-294 3603 11-03 06400 - CUSTOM WOODWORK
06400:01 – SCOPE A. Work Included: Compete fabrication of the following millwork and deliver to the job site: 1. Cabinets and Counter Tops. 2. Miscellaneous wall trim. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Finish Carpentry Section 0620
06400:02 - GENERAL A. Experience: Only experienced and capable foreman and mechanics shall be used. 1. Quality Standards: The Quality Standards of the American Woodwork Industry shall apply and by reference are made a part of this specification. 2. If, after erection, any work is found to be defective in workmanship of materials, such work shall be removed and replaced. B. Field Dimensions: The woodwork manufacturer is responsible for details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions, and shall show on his shop drawings all required field measurements beyond his control. The General Contractor and the woodwork manufacturer shall cooperate to establish and maintain these field dimensions. C. Inspection: Prior to delivery, inspect all millwork to insure that no sub-grade, defective, machine-marked or otherwise damaged pieces are delivered. D. Deliver and Storage 1. Millwork shall be delivered only after General Contractor indicates that proper storage will be provided at the job. 2. Store millwork in a protected area until the Contractor indicates he is ready to receive it. 3. Protect from damage by excessive changes in moisture. E. Shop Drawings 1. Provide 6 sets of shop drawings on all millwork items to the Architect for approval. 2. Show details of construction, fastenings, and support. 3. Submit shop drawings at earliest possible date so that other trades will not be delayed. 4. Verify measurements at building. 5. Deviations from plans in methods of construction and substitution of materials will be permitted and approved by the Architect, if these differences retain or increase the quality and workability of the millwork and the general appearance of the design are retained. 6. Do not proceed with fabrication until shop drawings have been approved by the Architect.
06400:03 - MATERIALS A. Lumber: Shall be kiln dried to 8% - 12% moisture content which shall be maintained during fabrication of millwork. 1. Plywood: a. Plywood Birch. b. Plywood, A-C where one surface is exposed; A-A where both surfaces are exposed. c. All plywood shall come from the same manufacturer. Manufacturer equal to U.S. Plywood, Simpson, or Weyerhaeuser Company. 2. Solid Stock: a. Birch FAS select.
106-294 3603 11-03 b. Approved Equal. 3. Laminated Plastic: a. Location: On counter- tops, where indicated on drawings. b. Material: A laminated plastic 1/16" thick, applied to standards set by National Electric Manufacturer’s Association for Class I High Pressure Decorative Laminates on 3/4" core. c. Color to be selected by Architect.
06400:04 - METHOD A. General: Fabricate as indicated or as otherwise approved in writing by the Architect. B. Quality Grade and Species: Shall conform to the quality grade and species called for under Woodwork for transparent finish and under Woodwork for painted finish. Quality grade is as designated in AWI Quality Standards, Section 400. C. Materials: 1. Cabinets and shelves to be natural finish: Solid stock Birch, doors and exposed plywood to be Birch. Shelves, back and miscellaneous plywood shall be Birch. Refer to Plans. D. Workmanship: 1. It is the intent of these specifications to require items or millwork complete and finished with the highest degree of workmanship. In general, millwork shall be completely fabricated at the shop as far as possible and delivered ready to set in place in largest units consistent with convenient erection. 2. Work material in best manner, using housed, lapped and other joints as indicated, glued to provide greatest strength and using a minimum of nails and screws. Nails and screws must be concealed, if used. Use glue clamps. 3. Round all exposed edges or corners of all wood millwork on a 1/16" radius. 4. Finish hardware furnished by Finish Hardware Section. Apply items as marked. 5. Plywood on vertical surfaces shall be placed with grain vertical. 6. Provide edgings on all exposed plywood edges. Edging shall be 1/4" solid matching material except as otherwise indicated. Glue solidly. 7. All millwork shall have No.00 Sandpaper finish ready for painting. Use Birch Dowels.
107-294 3603 11-03 DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07110 - MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
07110:01 - SCOPE A. Work Included: Furnish all materials and install Membrane Waterproofing (Moisture Barrier) complete with all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
07110:02 - MATERIALS A. Membrane Waterproofing (Moisture Barrier). 1. Moisture Barrier to be W. R. Meadows “Vapor-Mat” 10MIL, Stego Wrap 10MIL, or approved equal. 2. Tape for joints and penetrations shall be by manufacturer of Moisture Barrier having a perm rate of 0.01.
07110:03 - INSTALLATION A. Moisture Barrier to be laid continuously on compacted fill surface, penetrations are to be taped. All joints shall be taped.
108-294 3603 11-03 07160 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
07160:01 SCOPE A. Work included: Furnish all materials, labor and necessary incidentals to make this section complete.
07160:02 MATERIALS A. Dampproofing: Equal to Hydrocide 700 B as Manufactured by Sonneborn.
07160:03 INSTALLATION A. Location: Exterior Face of concrete masonry in cavity walls as indicated on Plans. B. Prepare existing surfaces and apply 2 coats of dampproofing in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.
109-294 3603 11-03 07170 - EXTERIOR DAMPPROOFING
07170:01 - SCOPE A. Work included: Furnish all materials, labor and necessary incidentals to make this section complete. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Caulking and Sealants: Section 07951 2. Stone: Section 04400
07170:02 - MATERIALS A. Equal to White Roc-7 from Sonneborn Division of Contech Inc., Minneapolis, Minnesota, and shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instruction.
07170:03 - INSTALLATION A. Location: All exterior stone. B. Application: 1. Before application, the surfaces to be treated shall be completely clean, dry, and free of previous coating and all loosely adherent spalled and foreign material. All stone defects shall be repaired and the surface shall be structurally sound prior to the application of this material. 2. Surfaces on which White Roc-7 is to be applied must be dry, clean and free from oil, grease and dirt. Do not apply in temperatures under 35 degrees F., or when surfaces are wet or may have frost on them. 3. Application can be by clean brush or spray. Airless or low pressure spray -- use a horizontal one. Do not use sprayer with rubber hose. It is extremely important that thorough saturation is accomplished over the entire surface area, but prevent runs when applying. 4. Use two (2) coats sealer for all new brick. Second coat may be applied when first coat is dry. Both coats of sealer shall be applied after the masonry is erected, and all caulking, patching and cleaning are finished. 5. Glass, Frames, Roofs, and all other surfaces not being treated with sealer must be covered to protect from splashing.
110-294 3603 11-03 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
07210:01 - SCOPE A. Work Included: Furnish and install insulation, with all incidentals necessary to make this section complete. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Gypsum Drywall System: Section 09260. 2. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100.
07210:02 - MATERIALS A. Acoustical Batt Insulation: 1. Unfaced glass fiber acoustical insulation meeting ASTM specification ASTM C 665, Type I and ASTM E 136. 2. Location: a. Walls: 3 ½" minimum, full 16" width, where shown on Plans. b. Refer to drawings for locations interior walls. B. Batt Insulation: 1. Fireproof, mineral wool or glass fiber blanket with Kraft faced vapor barrier on interior surfaces, meeting ASTM specification ASTM C 665-84. Type II, Class C. 2. Locations: a. Walls: 6" minimum, R- 19, full 16" width (exterior walls) where shown on Plans. b. Between Roof Framing: 8 1/4" R-30C or 91/2" R-30, full 24"width.
07210:03 - INSTALLATION A. General 1. Keep material dry. 2. Do not install until construction has progressed to the point that inclement weather will not damage or set the insulation material. 3. Fit ends snugly. 4. Install with joints off-set, minimum total number. 5. Cut and fit snugly around roof penetrations. 6. Any insulation that becomes wet for any reason shall be removed from the project. B. Batt Insulation: 1. In strict accordance with manufacturer’s specifications, make all joints as neatly airtight as possible.
111-294 3603 11-03 07410 - PREFORMED METAL ROOF
07410:01 - GENERAL: Furnish and install material, equipment, accessories and incidentals necessary to complete this section. A. Work included: 1. Roof Panels, fascias, flashing, gutters and downspouts, fasteners, and trim, as scheduled herein, located where indicated of Drawings. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Plywood Decking: Section 06113 C. Shop Drawings: Prior to fabrication, this Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval field erection drawings showing complete panel layout and all details. Submit six (6) sets.
07410:02 - MATERIALS: A. Metal Roof: 1. Shall be equal to Battenlock Mechanically Seamed Roof System as manufactured by MBCI, Lubbock, Texas, 1 -800-758-6224. 2. Panels shall be roll-formed in continuous lengths. Panels shall be 16" wide. 3. Panel shall be of 24 gauge hot-dipped galvanized steel. 4. Fascias, flashing, gutters, downspouts, trim and closers shall be factory formed from same type finish, as roof panels. 5. Finishes: a. All roofs, fascias, flashing, gutters, downspouts, trim and closures to be Signature 300 Metallic Kynar 500, Copper Metallic Color, smooth Texture. 6. Other approved Manufacturers: a. AEP - SPAN - SPAN Metals Corporation, Dallas, Texas 1-800-527-2503, www.aepspan.com. b. Vickwest, 1-800-477-9066. c. Approved Equal.
07410:03 - INSTALLATION A. This Contractor shall examine the solid sheathing and alignment of metal supports before proceeding with installation. B. Provide one (1) layer of 30 pound felt laid and lapped horizontally starting at the eave over the entire roof area. C. Erection of panels must be started correctly and the sheets held true to line. Horizontal lines are to be straight and level and vertical lines plumb. D. Erection of the panels shall be performed by specially trained mechanics. E. Install metal roof system in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and shop drawings. Metal Roof shall Mechanically Seamed Roof System.
112-294 3603 11-03 07600 - SHEET METAL WORK
07600:01 - SCOPE A. Work included: Furnish and install all metal flashing, gutters, downspouts and trim with all incidentals necessary to make this section of the work complete. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Metal Roofing: Section 07610 2. Flashing of Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical Items: Mechanical Specifications.
07600:02 - MATERIALS A. Refer to Drawings for kind and gauges of metals. B. Sheet metal referred to as galvanized iron shall be: 1. Armco Zincgrip - Paintgrip steel where exposed. (Painted) 2. Armco Zincgrip steel where not sight exposed. 3. Where indicated on Drawings: Sheet Metal Finish shall match Metal Roofing Finish. 4. Sheet metal shown on Drawings shall be 24 gauge, unless indicated otherwise. 5. Nails and fastening devises shall be galvanized.
07600:03 - FABRICATION AND APPLICATION A. Shape and install sheet metal as indicated and as recommended by manufacturer. Furnish those items to be installed by others to the proper trade for installation. B. Embed flashing in caulking compound or asphalt plastic cement as indicated. C. Make waterproof corner joints by soldering solidly.
113-294 3603 11-03 07700 - WALL FLASHING
07700:01 - SCOPE A. Work included: Furnish all materials and wall flashing complete with all incidentals necessary to complete the work.
07700:02 - MATERIALS A. Membrane Flashing: 1. Equal to Sonneborn Chemstruction Systems “ Hyrocide Vinylseal “ No. CS-204 flashing as manufactured by Sonneborn, 1537 Greengrass Drive, Houston, Texas 77008. B. Adhesive: Contech Adhesive - recommended by manufacturer.
07700:03 - INSTALLATION A. Membrane flashing to be placed as shown on Drawings. B. Surfaces shall be thoroughly dry, free from loose materials, and reasonably smooth. C. Flashings shall be laid in a fresh bed of mortar above and below on adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. D. Flashings shall start ½" from outside of walls and shall be turned up as shown on the Drawings. E. Flashings shall be installed in lengths as long as possible with ends lapping 4" and coating the surfaces with Contech Lap Adhesive. F. Head and sill flashings shall extend 12" horizontally beyond either side of the opening and turn up at the ends.
114-294 3603 11-03 07900 - CAULKING AND SEALANTS
07900:01 - SCOPE A. Provide caulking at all locations indicated on the drawings and required to make the building weatherproof, and do all work necessary to make this section complete for sealing all expansion joints, windows, door frames and all other locations noted on drawings.
07900:02 - MATERIALS A. "Dow Corning 790", one part Building Sealant, Federal Specifications TT-S- 00230C, Type II (exterior caulking). B. Joint Backer Rod, equal to ETHAFOAM SB SEALANT BACKER ROD by Dow Chemical Co., size as required. C. "Dap" Acrylic Latex Caulk with Silicone (interior caulking).
07900:03 - INSTALLATION A. Remove dust and all foreign matter from spaces to receive caulking and sealants. See that surfaces are dry, and all finish wood members are back-primed. Apply caulking and sealants in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. For spaces more than ½" deep, use backer rod so that remaining depth is approximately ½" below surface. C. Apply caulking with gun, forcing into spaces without voids adjoining materials. D. Apply continuous beads of caulking under all exterior thresholds. E. Protect other materials, and remove all surplus caulking compound from other surfaces. F. All caulking shall be recessed a minimum of 1/4" from face of joints to be caulked. G. Prime all joints with primer as recommended by manufacturer.
115-294 3603 11-03 DIVISION 8 – DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS
08100 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS & FRAMES
08100:01 - SCOPE A. Work Included: Provide and install hollow metal doors and frames with all incidentals necessary for completion of this section. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Finish Hardware: Section 08700. 2. Weatherstripping: Section 08730. 3. Wood Doors: Section 08200. C. Submittals: 1. Submit Manufacturer's construction and installation details to the Architect for approval before installation.
08100:02 - MATERIALS A. Hollow Metal Doors: General 1. Doors with warps, bends, breaks, or other damages will be rejected. 2. Manufacturer to obtain templates or samples of all hardware items to be mounted on the doors from the hardware supplier prior to fabrication of doors; doors not properly prepared for hardware will be rejected. 3. Lock and hinge stiles shall be accurately mortised and reinforced to receive hardware. The closer shall be bolted with sex bolts, field applied. 4. Doors shall receive one shop coat of rust inhibitive primer before shipment. B. Hollow Metal Doors 1. Doors to be constructed of No. 18 gauge cold rolled steel, flush, seamless with mechanically interlocked vertical edges. 2. Top and bottom channels shall be No.16 gauge closed finish. 3. The vertical edge joint between the face sheets shall be continuously welded together. This joint shall be ground smooth to provide a completely flush door with no exposed seams. C. Frames: 1. Frames shall be 16 gauge cold rolled, commercial grade sheet steel for 1- 3/4" doors, see Drawings for special details. 2. Frames shall be cold rolled, formed with integral stops and rebates. Frames shall be mitered, and internally welded: frames shall be shipped assembled. 3. Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb. 4. Door frames shall be fully mortised and reinforced for finish hardware specified in section entitled "Hardware." Reinforcements for hardware shall not be less than 10 gauge steel and shall be drilled and tapped and ready for hardware application. 5. Mark plainly each door frame as to its exact location in the building. 6. Drill holes in frames 18" from top and bottom on the lock side and provide rubber silencers similar to Glynn-Johnson GJ64. 7. Frames shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust and oil, and shall be finished with two coats of baked-on rust inhibitive primer. 8. Fire Door Frames shall carry the same Underwriter’s Label as the door, 20 minutes for label doors.
116-294 3603 11-03
08100:03 - INSTALLATION A. Set in place plumb and square. B. Protect from work of others. C. Store frames in weather-proof area until they are installed.
117-294 3603 11-03 08120 - ALUMINUM. WINDOWS, DOORS, FRAMES, & STOREFRONTS
08120:01 - SCOPE A. Work included: 1. Provide and install all aluminum windows, doors, frames and storefront materials, aluminum entrance doors, and incidentals necessary to make this section of the work complete. 2. Reuse existing doors where noted on Plans. B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Glass and Glazing: Section 08800 2. Caulking and Sealants: Section 07951 3. Finish Hardware: Section 08700 C. Submittals: 1. Submit six (6) copies of manufacturer’s construction and installation details to Architect for approval before installation. D. Guarantee: 1. Guarantee aluminum frames against defective material and workmanship for two (2) years after acceptance of building.
08120:01 - MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Aluminum entrance doors, transoms, side lights, windows and related items shall be equal to Trifab “450, Trifab “451"and Trifab “400" as manufactured by Kawneer Company. Finish shall be Permanodic # 40 Dark Bronze. 2. Extruded sections and alloy shall meet manufacturer’s specifications for model shown on Drawings. Numbers refer to Trifab “450," Trifab “451," and Trifab “400". 3. Door shall be bolted and electric arc signs welded. Welding shall be at unexposed junction of rails and stiles. The welds shall have deep penetration without creating blemishes on exposed surfaces. 4. Hardware for the doors shall be furnished by the door manufacturer and applied at the factory. Prepare doors for closers as required. B. Doors and Frames: 1. Doors shall be Kawneer 350 medium stile, dimensions as shown. 2. Doors shall have extruded aluminum snap-in glass stops with vinyl insert or Thiokol glazing. 3. The door stops shall be applied to the frame with concealed fastenings with pile insert for weather-proofing and door silencing. 4. Vinyl shall be extruded and color shall be bronze to closely match aluminum. 5. Doors and storefront materials shall have Permanodic # 40 Dark Bronze to match existing storefront. Thickness of Anodic coating shall not be less than .0007" thick. All shall be free of scratches, die marks and blemishes. 6. Doors shall be weather-stripped three sides with silicon plastic pile installed in the door frame. Attach a pile sweep to the bottom rail of the door. C. Hardware: (See door schedule for specialty items.) 1. Doors to have pivot hinges. 2. Each door shall have one pull and one matching push style “F-2". Hardware shall match respective door finish.
118-294 3603 11-03 3. Doors indicated shall have lockset. Lockset shall be “Adams Rite” one or two point deadlock # MS 1851 S with “ Adams Rite” # 880 Concealed Panic Exit Hardware - Style ”G-2" pull handle with “V” push bar. 4. One overhead concealed closer per leaf at new doors (KAWNEER SAM II). 5. Threshold as per drawings. 6. All items to be Manufacturers recommended type compatible for doors. 7. All hardware must be A.D.A. approved.
0812:03 - INSTALLATION A. Fabricate and install in best workmanlike manner. B. Protect Finish. C. Replace defective materials. D. Adjust as required all items of operating hardware on doors.
0812:04 - PROTECTION AND CLEANING OF ALUMINUM: A. All aluminum surfaces in contact with plaster or other caustic materials shall receive a heavy coat of zinc chromate. B. All aluminum when delivered to the job shall have 2 coats of factory applied Methacrylate Lacquer. C. At all points of contact where there is a possibility of electrolytic action between aluminum and adjacent materials, absolute protection shall be provided by this section. D. All aluminum shall be thoroughly cleaned, following the procedure recommended by the door manufacturers, including washing with mild soap and water. No abrasive or caustic or acid cleaning agents shall be used.
119-294 3603 11-03 08200 - WOOD DOORS
08200:01 - SCOPE A. Work Included: 1. Furnish all materials and incidentals necessary to complete this section. 2. New wood doors and related items as indicated. 3. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: a. Installation of Doors. Section 06200 b. Finish Hardware. Section 08700 B. Standards: 1. All interior and exterior wood doors shall comply with standards of the National Woodwork Mfg. Assn. and AWI “Custom Grade” Quality.
08200:02 - MATERIALS A. Wood Doors: 1. Solid Core Wood Doors: (interior) 1 3/4“ thick. a. Type II water- resistant bond. b. Core construction: Solid particle board core and 1/8" thick flush hardwood face panels matched for color and grain. c. Veneer to be birch. Face edges.
08200:03 - INSTALLATION A. Specified under “Finish Carpentry,” Section 06200.
120-294 3603 11-03 08700 - FINISH HARDWARE
08700:01 - SCOPE A. Work Included: 1. This Contractor shall furnish all necessary finishing hardware required for the job whether specifically mentioned or not. 2. The hardware schedule is to illustrate the type, weight, operation, class, and quality of hardware required. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Installation: Section 06200 C. Submittals: Submit hardware schedule to Architect for approval and include names of manufacturers for each item on the schedule.
08700:02 - MATERIALS A. Door Hardware: 1. See Door Hardware Schedule in this Specification. B. Cabinet Hardware: 1. Refer to cabinet details on Drawings for type and location.
08700:03 - INSTALLATION A. Specified Section 06200. B. Adjusting: 1. After installation and painting, the hardware Supplier shall inspect all hardware for proper operation. 2. The Contractor shall make necessary corrections, and replacements. C. Hardware shall be in perfect working order at the completion of the job. The Owner will provide final cores to be installed at completion of construction.
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
Door 1 Exterior from Vestibule 101 Pair 3'-0" x 7'-0" x 1 3/4" AL/AL
Provide cylinders compatible with Door and New Keying System. Other Hardware by Door Manufacturer.
Door 5 Exterior from Corridor 108 Door 7 Exterior from Conference 115 Door 22 Corridor 108 from Corridor 109 3'-0" x 7'-0" x 1 3/4" AL/AL
Provide cylinders compatible with Door and New Keying System. Other Hardware by Door Manufacturer.
Door 6 Exterior from Storage 119 Pair - 3'-0" x 7'-0" x 1 3/4" HM/HM 6 Hinges F 179 4.5" x 4.5" NRP US10 S 1 lockset M531 DN 612 F
121-294 3603 11-03 2 - Head & Foot Bolts 3915 BZ T 2 - Door Stops 1224 - 5 BZ T
Door 8 Exterior from Conference 115 3'-0" x 7'-0" x 1 3/4" HM/HM
3 Hinges F 179 4.5" x 4.5" NRP US10 S 1 EXIT Device 18R BA 612 M
Door 2 Vestibule 101 from Lobby 102 Pair 3'-0" x 7'-0" x 13/4" AL/AL
Hardware by Door Manufacturer
Door 3 Exterior from Women 103 Door 4 Exterior from Men 104 3'-0" x 7-0" x 1 3/4" HM/HM
6 Hinges FBB 179 4.5" x 4.5" NRP US10 S 2 Double Cylinder Dead Lock K 931 612 F 2 Pull Plates 1802 - 4 612 T 2 Push Plates 1807 - 4 612 T 2 Closers 8501 PA DA US10 N
Door 9 Storage 114 from Conference 115 Pair 3'-0" x T-0" x 1 3/4" WD/HM
6 Hinges F 179 4.5"x4.5" US10 S 1 Passage Set B 101 D 612 F 1 Dummy Trim B12 D612 F 2 Head and Foot Bolts W3913 BZ T 2 Wall Stops 1274 CCS BZ T
Door 10 Break 112 from Conference 115 Door 12 Break 112 from Corridor 109 Door 13 Corridor 109 From Conference 115 3'-0" x 7'-0" x 1 3/4" WD/HM
9 Hinges F179 4.5"x4.5" US10 S 3 Passage Sets B 101 D 612 F 3 Wall Stops 1274 CCS BZ T
Door 11 AC 113 from Break 112 Door 24 Mech 121 from Corridor 108 Door 30 Mech 121 from Corridor 108 Door 31 Mech 121 from Corridor 108 2'-6" x 7'-0" x 1 3/4" WD/HM
122-294 3603 11-03 12 Hinges F179 4/5"x4.5" US10 S 4 Locksets B581 D612 F
Door 14 Women 117 from Corridor 116 Door 15 Men 118 from Corridor 116 3'-0" x 7'-0" x 1 3/4" WD/HM
6 Hinges F179 4.5"x4.5" US10 S 2 Privacy Locks B301 D612 F
Door 16 Corridor 116 from Storage 119 Door 17 Workroom 120 from Storage 119 Door 18 Corridor 109 from Workroom 120 Door 19 Corridor 109 from Office 111 Door 20 Corridor 109 from Office 22 Door 25 Corridor 108 from Storage 119 3'-0" x 7'-0" x 1 3/4" WD/HM
18 Hinges F 179 4.5" x 4.5" US10 S 6 Locksets B 511 D 612 F 6 Wall Stops 1274 CCS BZ T
Door 21 Lobby 102 from Office 110 3'-0" x 7’-0” x 1 3/4" Dutch Door WD/HM
4 Hinges F 179 4.5" x 4.5" US10 S 1 Lockset B511 D612 F 1 Dead Bolt No. D861 US10 F 1 Wall Stop 1274 CCS BZ T
Door 23 Corridor 108 from Women 106 Door 26 Corridor 108 from Men 105 3'-0" x 7-0" x 1 3/4" WD/HM
6 Hinges FBB 179 4.5"x 4.5" US10 S 2 Double Cylinder Dead Locks No. D 831 612 F 2 Pull Plates 1802-4 612 T 2 Push-Plates 1807-4 612 T 2 Closers 8501 PA DA US10 N
Door 27 Men 105 from Janitor 107 3’-0” x 7'-0" x 1 3/4" HM/HM
3 Hinges F179 4.5"x4.5" US10 S 1 lockset B 501 D US10 F 1 Wall Stop 1274 CCS BZ T
Door 28 Men 105 from Men 104
123-294 3603 11-03 Door 29 Women 106 from Women 103 3'-0" x 7'-0" x 1 3/4" HM/HM
6 Hinges FBB 179 4.5"x4.5” US10 S 2 Double Cylinders Dead Lock K 931 612 F 2 Push Plates 1807-4 612 T 2 Pull Plates 1802-4 612 T 2 Closers 8501 PA DA US 10 N 2 Floor Stop/ Holders 1224 BZ T
MANUFACTURER'S LIST
Stanley (or approved equal) S Falcon (or approved equal) F Norton (or approved equal) N Trimco (or approved equal) T
124-294 3603 11-03 08730 – WEATHERSTRIPPING
08730:01 - SCOPE A. Furnish all labor, materials, and incidentals necessary to complete this section. B. Work Included: 1. Weatherstripping of exterior doors and windows.
08730:02 - MATERIALS A. Weatherstripping: 1. Refer door and window schedules and notes on drawings. B. Submit substitutions for approval by Architect. C. Furnish screws for installation of weatherstrip, self tapping or concrete plug as necessary. Quantity required for secure installation.
08730:03 - INSTALLATION A. Locate as shown on drawings. B. Installation left as weather tight as possible. C. Weatherstripping at head and jamb shall be continuous and not broken for installation of any miscellaneous hardware.
125-294 3603 11-03 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING
08800:01 - SCOPE A. Work Included: Provide and install glass for all sash and fixed glass areas, and all necessary incidentals to make this section of work complete. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Aluminum Windows, Doors, Frames & Storefront: Section 08120
08800:02 - MATERIALS A. 1" Insulating Glass: All insulating glass shall be constructed of equal thickness of glass. The exterior shall be 1/4" bronze tinted float glass and interior shall be clear 1/4" float glass as manufactured by Libby-Owens-Ford with ½" air space. All glass shall meet ASTM C 1036-85. Use tempered safety glass where required by code. B. 3/4" Insulating Tempered Glass manufactured and tested to pass IGCC, CBA, ASTM E- 774-83. Glass to be selected quality Tempered Glass (Bronze Tinted) complying with Federal Specification DD-9-1403B. C. 1/4" clear tempered safety glass: Shall be equal to tempered safety glass manufactured by Libby- Owens-Ford with ½" airspace. All glass shall meet the ANSI Standard. D. 1/4" Clear Float Glass: shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1036-90 Standard Specification for float glass. E. Glazing Sealant: Clear Silicone Sealant, gun applied.
08800:03 - INSTALLATION A. Refer to Window and Door schedules, elevations for locations. B. Glass shall be set according to standard glazing practices and details shown on drawings. C. Do not glaze openings if condition is not acceptable, notify Architect. D. Provide tolerances for expansion, contraction and deflection, shim as necessary. E. All edges of glass shall be cut accurately, protect edges. F. Replace all glass broken during or after setting. Replace glass due to imperfect setting without charge. Breakage due to accident or carelessness of others will be charged to trade at fault. G. Apply sealant only if leakage occurs.
08800:04 - CLEAN-UP A. Remove all glass cuttings, scraps, packaging, and rubbish upon completion of the work. B. Glass shall be thoroughly cleaned, inside and out, carefully removing all foreign substances and washed with clean water.
126-294 3603 11-03 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09110 - LATHING
09110:01 - GENERAL A. Furnish, install lath, accessories, as a base for plaster work on all surfaces indicated. B. Install inserts, and all items furnished by others. C. Related work in other sections: Plaster - Section 09180
09110:02 - MATERIALS A. Channels: cold rolled, pressed steel, painted, uniform straight. 1. 3/4" weight 300 lbs. Per M lin. Ft. 2. 1 ½" weight 475 lbs. Per M lin. Ft. 3. 2" weight 600 lbs. Per M lin. Ft. B. Metal Lath: equal to mfg. by Wheeling Corrugating Company 1. 3.4 lb. per square yard - Diamond Mesh Lath. 2. Where installed over solid backing, use self furring lath with staggered indentions spaced to hold lath away from backing. C. Accessories: 1. Wire: cold drawn annealed, galvanized No. 8 ga., 16 ga., 18 ga. 2. Nails and Screws: As required by the Metal Lath Mfg. Assn. 3. Casing Bead: No. 66x. 4. Expansion Joint: No. 15. 5. Corner Bead: No. 1-x. 6. Cornerite and Stripite: No. 25 Superior. 7. Numbers used: Penmetal, to establish quality. All exterior materials formed white metal (zinc alloy), interior materials galvanized.
09110:03 - APPLICATION A. Comply with specifications of the Metal Lath Manufacturers Association and ASA No. A42.4, latest revision, using the above specified materials. B. Metal Lath: 1. Lap lath 1" at sides, ends, lap lath over chases, recesses; 4" on all sides. Long dimension of lath across supports. 2. Stagger end joints over supports or lace together between supports. Space attachment for securing lath not more than 6" apart. 3. Secure lath to sheathing. 4. Reinforce corners of all openings with 12" or 24" strip of Cornerite or Stripite. C. Corner beads, expansion joints, set plumb, level, form true risers, neat miters. Secure at ends and not more than 12" apart with galvanized staples or wires, staggered. Install corner beads at all vertical, horizontal, external plaster corners. Install expansion joints in all surfaces; maximum 15 feet centers and or as indicated on drawings or directed by Architect. Casing beads to be used where any plaster edge is exposed, and at all perimeters of plaster soffits.
127-294 3603 11-03
09180 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09180:01 - SCOPE A. Work Included: 1. Furnish all materials and labor for installing Portland Cement Plaster with all incidentals necessary to complete the work of this section. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Lathing: Section 09110. 2. Painting: Section 09900.
09180:02 - MATERIALS A. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 206-49, if required by manufacturer, lime shall be allowed to soak for 24 hours before use. If necessary to obtain fine, textured putty, mix lime with water and screen through a sieve. B. Sand: ASTM C35-67. C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150-67, Type 1. D. Water: Shall be clean and free from deleterious substances.
09180:03 - MIXES A. General: 1. Mix in accordance with manufacturer’s directions. 2. Clean mixers, boxes and tools after each batch. 3. Mix thoroughly with correct amount of water until uniform consistency. 4. Measure materials accurately. B. Portland Cement Plaster: 1. All three coats shall be mixed by volume as follows: 1 part Portland Cement, 3 parts sand, 1/4 part lime putty for cement plaster and 1/10 part of stucco; for scratch coat on metal lath, 1 lb. of hair or fiber shall be added per sack of cement. 2. Proportion all batches exactly alike. The mix for the finish coat shall not contain more than 35% by weight of the whole sample of materials passing the 100 mesh sieve. Mix materials or uniform color before water is added. 3. Add water and mix to desired consistency. 4. Mix mechanically for a minimum of 5 minutes. 5. Plaster may be allowed to stand up to 3 hours before using, providing it is remixed frequently without adding water. Admixtures to hasten set not allowed. 6. Using plaster after set has begun is not allowed. 7. Provide Portland Cement Plaster finish coat with a minimum compressive strength of 2,000 lbs. Per square inch and with a maximum moisture absorption of 10% at 28 days. 8. The finish coat will be painted as specified in 09900.
09180:04 - INSTALLATION A. Preparation: 1. Maintain temperature of at least 40 degrees F. In building prior to plaster application, during its application, until it is dry. Do not apply exterior plaster unless temperature
128-294 3603 11-03 is 40 degrees F. or higher. Any plaster work which freezes within 48 hours of application shall be removed and replaced with new plaster. 2. Remove rust, oil, grease or other foreign substance which might hinder good bond from metal lath immediately prior to application of plaster. 3. Commencing work will be construed as acceptance of preceding work performed by others as suitable to receive work specified in this section. 4. Erect and maintain scaffolding in accordance with all applicable laws and regulations, local or other. 5. Comply with American Standards Association A 42.1 and Plaster’s Manual for Applying Portland Cement Stucco by the Portland Cement Association. 6. Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing manufacturer’s names and brand. B. Application: 1. Finished plaster thickness 1" or as indicated on drawings. 2. General: a. See that screeds are properly set in place in scratch coat and set for the proper thickness of the plaster. b. Make scratch coat a little wetter than usual in order to completely encase metal lath. c. Comply with specifications in the Plaster’s Manual for Applying Portland Cement Stucco and Plaster, as published by the Portland Cement Association. d. Before applying brown and finish coats, spray the preceding coats with a fine spray of water. Spray on only enough water to dampen the surface immediately in advance of each successive coat. e. It is highly important that the brown and finish coats be kept damp for a minimum of 24 hours after application for curing. Keep surfaces damp by intermittent spraying with a hot spray of water. High pressure spray not allowed. Begin moistening each coat as soon as the plaster has hardened sufficiently not to be injured. DO NOT SOAK SURFACES, but apply only as much water as will be readily absorbed. f. After the damp-curing period, allow the plaster to dry thoroughly before the next is applied. g. Allow a minimum of 7 days interval between application of brown coat and finish coat. h. Coats: (1) Scratch Coat: Apply with sufficient force and material to form full keys or bond. Cross scratch as soon as scratch coat has attained its initial set, and apply brown coat as soon as practicable. (2) Brown Coat: Scratch or broom for bond of finish coat and allow to set hard. Keep brown coat moist until finish coat is applied. (3) Textured Finish Coat: Dash and trowel finish (matching existing texture) - Trowel on 1st coat, dash with fairly stiff mortar partially covering surface: After moisture has left surface, trowel down high spots. Keep cement plaster moist for at least 3 days and protect against rapid drying until cured. C. Workmanship: 1. Protect walls, floors and work of other trades. 2. All work to be three coat work.
129-294 3603 11-03 3. Keep plaster from drying too rapidly and freezing. 4. Finish coats in a plane and free from defects. 5. Cooperate with other trades. D. Patching: 1. Point up around trim and other set work. 2. Cut out and patch all defective work free of charge. 3. Plaster damaged by other trades will be patched and charged to the trade at fault. 4. Patching plaster to match and finish level with adjoining plaster, E. Cleaning and Protection: 1. Rubbish and debris to be removed as often as necessary. 2. Clean plaster spots from work of other trades. 3. Protect finish plaster from injury.
130-294 3603 11-03 09260 - GYPSUM DRYWALL SYSTEM
09260:01 - SCOPE A. Work Included: 1. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment to erect non-load bearing partitions with related metal components and accessories, as required, and surface with Gypsum Wall Board System. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Finishing of Gypsum Board: Section 09900. 2. Insulation: Section 07200. 3. Light Gage Framing: Section 05400.
09260:02 - MATERIALS A. Steel studs to be light-weight steel channels ( 3 5/8" ) #358ST25 ( 25 Ga ) and (6) #600ST25 (25Ga.) B. Metal floor and ceiling runners, (3 5/8") #358CR25 (25Ga.) And (6") #600CR25 (25Ga.) C. 5/8"Fire Code “X” gypsum board, tapered edge wall board, 48"wide. D. Sheetrock Brand Exterior Gypsum Ceiling Board: 5/8" Firecore, 48" wide. E. Corner Bead: 1. Exterior corners, Dura Bead. 2. Interior corners, No.400 Series metal trim or No. 100 Perf-A-Bead. F. Metal Trim: #200A and #401. G. DWC Drywall Furring Channels. H. 1 ½" Metal Furring Channels. I. Fasteners to be Drywall Screws, Type S, as required. J. Joint Treatment: Perf-A-Tape Joint System. K. Laminating Adhesive: Per Manufacturer recommendation. L. Numbers and names referred to are United States Gypsum.
09260:03 - INSTALLATION A. In cold weather the building should be heated during the application of the gypsum base or gypsum wall board and joint treatment to maintain a uniform temperature in the range of 45 degrees F. to 70 degrees F. and ventilation should be provided to eliminate excessive moisture. B. All materials as specified, shall be delivered on the job in original unopened containers or bundles, and stored in a place protected from damage and exposure to the elements. C. Directions for the installation and application of all materials shall be in accordance with the latest printed directions of the manufacturer. D. Runners shall be aligned accurately at floor and ceiling and securely anchored with suitable fasteners spaced not more than 24" o.c. Attach to structure with studs and runners or with Metal Braces at 4'0" o.c. Refer to section and details. E. Studs shall be positioned vertically in the runners, space no greater than 24" in interior walls. Refer to Drawings. Refer to Drawings for stud spacing center to center. Anchor all studs located adjacent to door and window frames, partition intersections and corner to runner flanges by positive screw engagement through each stud flange and runner flange. F. Studs shall be located not more than 2" from all door frames jambs abutting partitions, partition corners and other construction. Studs shall be securely anchored to the jamb and head anchor clips of each door or borrowed light frame by bolt or screw attachment
131-294 3603 11-03 (not required for frames with structural bar struts.) Over metal door, a cut-to-length section of runner track with web-flange bend at each end, shall be positioned horizontally and securely screw each attached to the adjacent vertical studs. A cut- to- length shall be positioned at the location of vertical joints over the door frame header extending to the ceiling runner. G. Gypsum wallboard shall be applied with long dimension (parallel) to framing members, and all wallboard of the maximum practical length shall be neatly fitted and staggered. Joints on opposite side of the partition shall be so arranged as to occur on different studs. H. All joints, screw heads and other depressions in the surface of the wallboard shall be treated in accordance with the recommended manner with Perf-A-Tape Joint System. I. All internal and external angles formed by the intersection of higher wallboard surfaces or other surfaces shall receive pre-finished trims in accordance with the Drawing details. J. All vertical or horizontal external corners shall have Perf-A-Tape or Dura-A-Bead Corner Reinforcement applied in accordance with details
132-294 3603 11-03 09300 - CERAMIC TILE
09300:01 - SCOPE A. Work Included: 1. Furnish all labor, materials and incidentals necessary to make this section complete.
09300:02 - QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturers: 1. DAL Tile Corp. 2. American Olean Tile Co.
09300:03 - MATERIALS A. Floor Tile and Base - Refer to Finish Schedule. 1. Tile shall be Flat Face, Square, Ceramic Mosaics Tile conforming to ANSI 137.1. 2. Size: 2"x 2" x 1/4"thick. 3. Base to be cove with bullnose cap. 4. Colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard range of colors. B. Glazed Floor and Wall Tile: Refer to Finish Schedule. 1. Tile shall be textured, square matte glazed tile conforming to ANSI 137.1 2. Equal to: “Stoneworks” or “ Stony Creek” as manufactured by American Olean Tile Co. 3. Size: a. 12" x 12" x 5/16" - Stony Creek b. 13" x 13" x 3/8" - Stoneworks 4. Colors as selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s Standard Range of Colors. C. Mortar and Grout Materials: 1. Dry set mortar, confirming to ANSI A118.1. 2. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar - ANSI A118.4. 3. Grout - ANSI A118.6.
09300:04 - INSTALLATION A. Install floor tile in accordance to ANSI Standard specification ANSI A108 for floor tile and ANSI A108.1 for grout. (TCA method F 112 ). B. Install Wall Tile in Accordance to ANSI Standard Specifications ANSI A108.5 for Wall Tile and ANSI A 108.1 for Grout (TCA W 212). C. Tile shall not be set when temperature is below 40 degrees F. D. Broken, cracked, marred or otherwise defective tile shall be replaced before mortar is set. All necessary cutting, as far as practical, shall be smooth, straight, and free from chipping. E. All grouting and pointing of joints shall be done on the same day that tile is set. Grout full depth of joint.
09300:05 - CLEANING A. Upon completion of the work, remove all unused materials and rubbish. Clean all completed work thoroughly. B. After the grout has sufficiently hardened, all tiles shall be thoroughly cleaned with soap and water, followed by thorough rinsing with clean water. Where soap and water fail to produce a satisfactory clean surface, confer with Architect for approved cleaning method.
133-294 3603 11-03 C. Protect floor tile until all work that may damage floors is completed. D. Tiles which become marred, scratched, chipped or broken prior to final acceptance shall be removed and replaced by Contractor at not additional cost to Owner.
134-294 3603 11-03 09330 - QUARRY TILE
09330:01 - SCOPE A. Work included: 1. Furnish all labor, materials and incidentals necessary to make this section complete.
09330:02 - QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturers: 1. American Olean Tile Co. 2. Monarch Tile Co. 3. Dal - Tile
09330:03 - MATERIALS A. Quarry Tile 1. Floor tile shall be standard grade quarry tile conforming to ANSI 137.1. 2. Size: 6" x 6" square. 3. Color to be selected by Architect from standard flashed colors. B. Setting Materials 1. Bond Coat: Dry set mortar, conforming to ANSI A118.1. 2. Latex - Portland Cement Mortar - ANSI A118.4. 3. Grout: Epoxy Grout, conforming to ANSI A118.3.
093300:04 - INSTALLATION A. Install Floor Tile in accordance to ANSI Standard Specification ANSI A108 for floor tile and ANSI A108.6 for grout (TCA method F 115.) B. Tile shall not be set when temperature is below 40 degrees F. C. Broken, cracked, marred or otherwise defective tile shall be replaced before the mortar is set. All necessary cutting, as far as practical, shall be smooth, straight and free from chipping. D. All grouting and pointing of joints shall be done on the same day that tile is set. Grout full depth of joint.
093300:05 - CLEANING A. Upon completion of the work, remove all unused materials and rubbish. Clean all completed tile work thoroughly. B. After the grout has sufficiently hardened, all tiles shall be thoroughly cleaned with soap and water, followed by thorough rinsing with clean water. Where soap and water fail to produce a satisfactory clean surface, confer with Architect for approved cleaning method. C. Protect Floor Tile until all work that may damage floors is completed. D. Tiles which become marred, scratched, chipped or broken prior to final acceptance shall be removed and replaced by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner.
135-294 3603 11-03 09510 -ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM
09510:01 - SCOPE A. Work included: Refer to Finish Schedule. 1. Furnish and install complete suspended system, where indicated. 2. Furnish and install ceiling panels in system. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Lighting Fixtures: Electrical Division 16.
09510:02 - MATERIALS A. Suspended Grid System: 1. The exposed grid suspension system shall be equal to Snap-Grid 200 System as manufactured by Chicago Metallic Corporation. 2. Main beams and cross tees shall be double thickness web bulb sections, 0.020" steel conforming to ASTM A-366, web height 1 ½" and 15/16" bottom flange. Each exposed bottom flange shall be continuous, with unbroken roll formed cap the length of each member. Cap shall be steel, with baked white enamel finish. 3. Angle molding shall have at least 15/16" exposed flanges, not less than 0.020" steel, same finish as grid system. 4. Finish: All steel roll formed parts shall be chemically cleansed, electro-galvanized and bonderized. All surfaces shall receive a high-bake enamel finish. 5. Accessories shall be specifically designed as an integral part of the grid system. They shall be installed as per manufacturer’s recommendations. 6. 24" x 48" and 24" x 24" grid layout. B. Ceiling Panels: 1. Equal to Fissured, 755 and 756, as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Square cut lay-in fissured. 2. Surface Finish - Factory-Applied Vinyl Latex Paint. 3. 24" x 48" board 5/8" thick, and 24" x 24" board 5/8" thick. 4. Class A per ASTM E 1264 and Federal specification SS-S118B.
09510:03 - INSTALLATION A. Install both suspension systems in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, for spacing and hanging. Hanger wire 12 gauge minimum. B. Provide edge angles and all incidentals for a complete installation. Finish matching exposed grid, detachable support. C. Install additional hanger wires at all four corners of recessed or surface mounted fluorescent light fixtures, support off main runners or cross members. D. All work performed by skilled mechanics in strict accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. E. Verify layout with Architect. Borders units shall be as close to equal as possible. F. Handle tile with care to prevent damage to or smudging of finished surface. Repair or replace all damaged or defective work. G. Furnish all required accessories to complete the work whether specifically specified or not.
09510:04 - CLEANING A. Following installation, clean soiled or discolored surfaces of units.
136-294 3603 11-03 B. Remove and replace units which are damaged or improperly installed.
137-294 3603 11-03 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE
09650:01 - SCOPE A. Work Included: Furnish labor, materials, and incidentals necessary to make this section complete.
09650:02 - GUARANTEE A. This Contractor shall furnish in writing on the form provided, a one-year guarantee against defective materials and workmanship for all items furnished and installed by him.
09650:03 - MATERIALS A. Vinyl composition tile shall conform to the following specifications: Federal Specification SS-T- 312B Type IV. B. Resilient Flooring shall be 1/8" thick, 12"X12" Tarkett, patterns from the Expressions, Basics and Architectural Thru-chip vinyl composition tile. C. Only perfect material will be permitted. No seconds, off-goods, or remnants will be allowed. D. Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer of tile used. E. Vinyl Base (coved) 1. 0.08 ga. Thickness a 4" high, top set ribbed back. 2. Color shall be selected by Architect. 3. Base shall be furnished in 4' - 0" length. 4. Provide preformed exterior corners. 5. As manufactured by Kentile, or approved equal. F. Rubber Stair Treads: 1. Shall be equal to 5A Service Weight Safe-T-Grip Rubber Stair Tread as manufactured by Johnsonite. 2. Color shall be selected from Standard colors by Architect.
09650:04 - SAMPLES A. Submit samples of each color and type of resilient flooring material to the Architect. Samples shall be marked with name of Contractor, name of project, and areas where material will be. B. Samples shall be the basis for the acceptance or rejection of material. Installed materials shall match the samples.
09650:05 - SCHEDULES A. All materials shall be located as shown on drawings and Room Finish Schedule. B. Color shall be selected by Architect. 09650:06 – INSTALLATION A. Remove grease, dirt and other substances from subfloors. Inspect floors for holes, cracks, and other abrasions. Do not proceed with laying tile until subfloors are smooth and all holes and cracks are filled. Subfloors which are not acceptable for receiving resilient flooring shall be reported to the General Contractor immediately. B. Maintain 70 degree F. Minimum temperature in rooms for 24 hours before and after laying. Stack tile in rooms at above temperatures for 24 hours before laying.
138-294 3603 11-03 C. Installation: Shall be performed by skilled workmen only, in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer. Fit neatly and snugly against walls, columns, and other projections. Provide chemically bonded seams.
09650:07 - CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE A. Cleaning after installation: 1. Do not scrub or use cleaner on newly installed Resilient Floor until four (4) days after installation to allow adhesive to set properly. 2. Sweep or brush loose dirt from floor. 3. Dip and wring mop out in a pail of correctly mixed cleaning solution and mop floor. Do not flood the floor. Rinse mop in second pail of clear water and wipe floor free of cleaning solution. 4. Follow manufacturer’s maintenance instructions. 5. All resilient flooring shall be protected from damage until the building is accepted by the owner.
.
139-294 3603 11-03 09682 - CARPET
09682:01 – SCOPE A. Work under this section of the Specifications consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, incidentals and the performance of all operations necessary to complete carpet work as indicated or reasonably inferred from the Drawings and Specifications. B. Work Included: 1. Carpet Flooring. C. General: 1. Read all other sections of the Specifications which together with the Drawings and this section, describe the carpet work. Verify all dimensions and conditions of the site. 2. It shall be the responsibility of the Bidder to provide the necessary yardage to cover all areas designated to receive carpet, including any waste as recognized by practice and the American Carpet Institute. 3. Layout for each area to be covered shall be submitted for approval showing pattern color, widths of carpeting, orientation of width, trim strips and any pertinent installation details. 4. All carpet when delivered to the job site shall have register number tags attached and intact. 5. Maintenance Manuals - the carpeting manufacturer shall furnish the Owner at least 3 printed copies of the manufacturer's recommendations for the care, cleaning and maintenance for the carpet furnished. D. Relations with Other Trades: 1. Cooperate and coordinate with other trades involved in this project where work of such trades affects or is affected by carpet work. 2. Before beginning work, inspect surfaces to receive carpet and notify Architect in writing, of any condition which will prevent proper installation, adherence, appearance or permanency of flooring. Do not begin work until any such conditions have been corrected or an agreement reached regarding later defects which may develop due to such conditions. 3. Surfaces to receive carpet shall be thoroughly clean and dry and in condition satisfactory to carpet installers. Coordinate with General Contractor for the repair of any surfaces not acceptable for carpet installation. E. Protection of Finish Work: 1. Protect adjacent surfaces and finish work damage due to carpet operations. 2. Remove spotting, stains, and smears to the satisfaction of Architect.
09682:02 -MATERIALS A. Carpet shall be equal to Wynford II as manufactured by Cambridge Commercial Carpets. 1. Construction: Tufted Textured Loop. 2. Gage: 1/10
140-294 3603 11-03 3. Pile Height as Tufted: 0.156 inch to 0.219 inch. 4. Pile Thickness: 0.187 inch. 5. Face Yarn: Diatron Solution Dyed Nylon. 6. Static Control: Less than 3.5 K.V. 7. Yarn Weight as Tufted: 26.0; per sq. yd. 8. Backing Material: Polypropylene. 9. Secondary Backing: Woven Polypropylene. 10. Stock Width: 12 feet. 11. Warranties: 10 year wear guarantee, colorfast warranty, lifetime static. 12. Flammability: Radiant panel ( E - 648 ) Class 1. 13. Smoke Density: NBS ( ASTM E - 662 ) 450 or less. 14. Soil Resistance: Scotchgard Commercial. 15. Color as approved by Architect. B. Adhesive: Kind and use of adhesive as recommended by manufacturer only. C. Edge Trim: As approved by Architect.
09682:03 - INSTALLATION A. Material shall be installed by qualified carpet mechanics in accordance with manufacturer’s installation. B. Surface Preparation: 1. The floor must be clean and free of any foreign substance, such as wax, paint, oil, etc. Use a commercial vacuum cleaner to remove all dirt and dust. 2. Cracks in concrete and other flooring must be filled with filler that is compatible with the carpet. C. Edge Trim: 1. Provide edge trim at all locations where carpet joins a different floor covering. D. Cleaning and Protection: 1. Remove debris from installation, carefully sorting pieces to be saved from scraps to be disposed of. 2. Vacuum carpet with a commercial machine, with rotation agitator or heater in the nozzle. Remove soiled spots. E. Workmanship: 1. All materials shall be installed by workmen skilled in the carpet trade, and shall meet or exceed the highest standards of the carpet industry. 2. All usable pieces of carpet left over after the installation is completed shall be returned to the Owner. 3. All carpet shall be cleaned thoroughly after completion of installation. 4. Upon completion, the carpet installation shall be inspected by the Architect before approval. F. Guarantee: 1. Industry standard of two years guarantee for materials shall prevail. All workmanship and installation shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year.
141-294 3603 11-03 09900 - PAINTING
00900:01 - SCOPE A. Work Included: Under this section furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for and reasonable incidental to the completion of all interior and exterior painting shown on the drawings and listed below and all other items normally furnished by the trade to make a complete and finished job. Items to be painted are generally as follows: 1. Interior: a. All exposed gypsum board. (New and existing) b. All doors and frames. (New and existing) c. All exposed metal work. (New and existing) d. All exposed wood trim. (New and existing) e. All millwork. (New and existing) f. Any items damaged during construction. g. Existing items where indicated. 2. Exterior: a. All exposed metal work except pre-finished items. (New and existing) b. All exposed pipe, conduit, boxes and devices, except pre-finished items. (New and existing) c. All exterior wood items as indicated on Drawings. (New and existing) d. All Exterior Plaster. e. Existing items where indicated. 3. Items Not Painted: a. Non-ferrous metal. b. Pre-finished items. c. Stone. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Priming of miscellaneous Metals: Section 05500
09900:02 - MATERIALS A. Basic Specifications for painting are set up around Jones - Blair Products. If products of another manufacturer are used, submit to Architect a complete brochure of projects in sufficient detail for Architect to evaluate the quality of the material. B. Following considered equal: 1. Pratt and Lambert. 2. Glidden. 3. Kelly Moore. 4. Sherwin Williams. 5. DeVoe. C. Only first line paints allowed.
142-294 3603 11-03 D. All painting materials such as linseed oil, turpentine, etc., shall be pure and of highest quality and approved by the Architect. They shall bear identifying labels on the container. E. All colors, including deep tones, shall be selected or approved by the Architect. The number of colors to be used on the job shall be determined by the Architect. F. Primers: Use primers specified by manufacturer of paint used.
09900:03 -PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. General: 1. Before commencing work, the Contractor shall make certain that surfaces to be painted are in the proper condition to receive paint. Should the painter find surfaces or conditions impossible for acceptance, he shall at once report same to the General Contractor. 2. Application of paint shall be held to denote acceptance of surfaces and working conditions by the paint Contractor, results reasonably to be expected from the materials, workmanship, and method of applications, under ideal conditions. B. Exterior Metal: 1. No exterior copper or aluminum shall be painted. 2. Galvanized metal shall first be cleaned thoroughly with mineral spirits and scrubbed lightly with fine steel wool. Next apply Lithoform made by American Chemical Paint Co., Ambler, Pennsylvania, or Galvaprep No. 5, made by Neilson Chemical Company, Detroit, Michigan, in exact accordance with the manufacturer's directions. 3. All non-galvanized metal shall be cleaned with mineral spirits and all burrs and rust removed. 4. All pre-finished metal shall be sanded to a smooth, even finish, removing all nibs, or runs, etc. C. Interior Metal and Pipes. 1. Clean thoroughly with mineral spirits. Sand or scrub with steel wool as required. 2. Neutralize galvanized metal as per 0990:03, B2 D. Gypsum Board: 1. Prepare joints and nail heads with Perf-A-Tape Joint System according to Manufacturer’s recommendations. Level smooth surface. 2. Apply one coat of Texture to produce a uniform fine sand textured surface. 3. Where wall covering is to be applied, no texture finish will be required. Size wall before applying covering. E. Wood: 1. Touch up knots, resinous spots, etc., with shellac 10 hours before applying prime coat of paint. 2. Putty all nail holes, cracks, and blemishes after the priming coat has dried. 3. Match putty to shade of the finish coat.
143-294 3603 11-03 4. Sand and dust before priming.
09900:04 - PAINT SCHEDULE A. Number of coats herein mentioned is in accordance with Manufacturer's Specifications for first quality finishes. Painting Contractor responsible for producing this finish, including number of coats deemed necessary to achieve this result. B. Exterior Work: 1. Enamel on Ferrous Metal: Miscellaneous exposed steel, piping, conduit, and miscellaneous sheet metal. a. Copper sulfate solution and galvanized iron primer on other as necessary. b. 1 coat J.B. 981 Rust-Not Primer. c. 2 coats J.B. Rust - Not High Gloss Alkyd Enamel.. 2. Exterior wood trim: a. 1 coat J.B. 807 Decorator Alkyd Primer. b. 2 coats J. B. Decorator Gloss Alkyd House Paint. 3. Exterior Plaster: a. 1 coat J.B. 947 Decorator Acrylic Latex Primer. b. 2 coats J.B. Decorator Acrylic House Paint. C. Interior Work: 1. Metal Work (including exposed piping, duct, conduits, etc.). a. 1 coat J.B. 908 Effectone Undercoater. b. 2 coats J.B. Decorator Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel. 2. Gypsum Board: a. 1 coat J.B. 1349 Decorator Speed Seal Primer. b. 2 coats J.B. Decorator Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 3. Wood Paneling, Wood Trim, Wood Doors & Frames & Cabinets: (Natural Satin Finish) a. 1 coat J.B. Velva - Grain Wood Stain. b. 1 coat J.B. 943 Clear Sanding Sealer. c. 1 coat J.B. 1233 Super Spar Gloss Polyurethane Finish. d. 1 coat J.B. 1234 Super Spar Velvet Polyurethane Finish.
09900:05 - INSTALLATION A. Protect this work and the work of others against damage by this section and properly repair same should any damage occur. B. Notify Contractor of any surface not in proper condition to be finished before proceeding with the work. Starting work shall constitute the Painter's acceptance of the preceding work and the conditions under finish will be applied, and his assumption of the responsibility for the results to be obtained. C. Exterior painting shall not be done while the surface is damp, or during cold, rainy, or frosty weather, or when temperature is likely to drop to freezing. Avoid painting surfaces while they are exposed to hot sun.
144-294 3603 11-03 D. Refer Room Finish Schedules for location of various finishes. E. Remove all finish hardware not primed for painting before work, leave hardware free of paint splatters. F. All necessary puttying of nail holes, cracks, etc., shall be done after the first coat, with putty of a color to match that of the finish. Putty shall be brought flush with the adjoining surface in a neat and workmanlike manner. G. All metal surfaces shall be washed with mineral spirits to remove any dirt, oil, or grease, before applying materials. Remove rust or scale by wire brushing or sanding clean before painting. Shop coats of paint that become marred shall be cleaned and touched up with primer specified. H. All galvanized metal surfaces shall be given a crystalline zinc phosphate pretreatment. Two proprietary projects for this purpose are Lithofoam, made by the American Chemical Paint Co., Ambler, Pennsylvania, and Galvaprep #5, made by the Neilson Chemical Co., Detroit, Michigan. I. All materials shall be applied under adequate illumination, evenly spread and smoothly flowed on without runs or sags. J. All coats shall be thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coats. K. All work where a coat of material has been applied must be inspected and approved by the Architect before the application of the succeeding coat, otherwise no credit for the coat applied will be given, and the Contractor automatically shall assume the responsibility to recoat the work in question. The Painting Contractor shall furnish the Architect a report of each coat applied when completed for inspection and approval to comply with the above. Each coat of paint shall be tinted a slightly different shade from other coats. L. All interior trim and cabinetry shall be back primed before installation. M. All woodwork to be finished with enamel or varnish shall be sanded smooth and the surface cleaned before proceeding with the application of the first coat. N. Tops, bottoms, and edges of doors shall be finished same as balance of doors after they are fitted by the carpenter. O. The Painting Contractor shall secure color schedules from the Architect for rooms before applying any paint finish.
09900:06 - PAINTING OF MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS:
A. All apparatus or materials herein specified to be painted shall first be cleaned, all rust scraped off, and all oil and grease removed before any paint is applied B. When any appliances or materials hereinafter specified to be primed at the factory are received at the work unprimed, they shall be painted immediately upon arrival, using paint of same materials as specified. C. The priming painting shall be done in addition to other painting work herein specified. D. All canvas covered and non-covered piping, canvas covered insulated ductwork, uninsulated ductwork, hangers, etc., where exposed to view in finished rooms shall be painted three coats paint.
145-294 3603 11-03 E. All canvas covered insulation of piping and ductwork shall be provided two coats of glue size (before painting) sufficiently shall be painted one coat of paint, color as selected by Architect. F. All bands on the pipe covering shall be removed during the painting of the coverings and shall be replaced after the paint on the coverings has become perfectly dry.
09900:07 -COLOR SCHEDULE A. A complete schedule of all colors and sheens will be prepared by the Architect for approval of the Owner. A copy of the approved schedule will be furnished to the General Contractor for distribution.
09900:08 - CLEANING A. Upon completion of work, touch up all unsatisfactory finishes as directed by the Architect, remove all paint from surfaces not to be painted, remove and dispose of all waste materials, containers, equipment, and debris.
146-294 3603 11-03 09952 - WALL COVERING
09952:01 - SCOPE A. Work included: Provide and install all vinyl wall covering with incidentals necessary to complete this section of the work. B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Gypsum Drywall System - Section: 0926 2. Painting - Section: 0990
09952:02 - MATERIALS- COLORS AND PATTERNS A. Provide integrally pigmented, opaque virgin vinyl calendared film vinyl wall covering material treated with mildew and antimicrobial additives and laminated to suitable backing. Comply with FS CCC-W-408A for types required. Medium duty; total weight thirteen (13) ounces per square yard minimum; vinyl coating seven (7) ounces per square yard minimum. B. The material shall meet ASTM E84-597 flame resistance requirements. C. The colors and patterns shall be selected by the Architect. Several colors and patterns may be selected. D. Adhesive to be as recommended by the manufacturer of the material selected.
09952:03 - SURFACES A. All surfaces shall be clean, dry, smooth and structurally sound. B. Prepare surface in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
09952:04 - WORKMANSHIP A. Install wall coverings in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
147-294 3603 11-03 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10162 - METAL TOILET PARTITIONS
10162:01 - SCOPE A. Work Included: Provide all metal toilet partitions with necessary incidentals and accessories to make this section of work complete. B. Location: Refer Drawings: Women 103 & 106. Men 104 & 105.
10162:02 - MATERIALS A. Manufacturer: The partitions to be Sanymetal Academy Flush type, as manufactured by the Sanymetal Products Company, 1705 Urbaba Road, Cleveland, Ohio, or any other nationally distributed manufacturer of recognized quality, providing they are equal in the opinion of the Architect to those specified. B. All metal compartments shall be flush type with pilaster fronts, headrail braced construction. 1. Partitions: Shall be one (1) inch thick, made of two (2) sheets of stretcher leveled furniture steel assembled over and cemented under pressure to a dense, sound- deadening, insulation core; the sheets to have edges formed to take a continuous oval shape crown locking mould on all four sides with corners mitered, welded and ground smooth. 2. Shall be same construction as panels, but in addition edges of face sheets to be welded at intervals to insure rigidity. Doors shall be approximately 32" wide and shall swing into the compartment. At Handicap Compartments door shall swing out. 3. Pilasters: To be same construction as the doors except that they will be 1 1/4" thick, with reinforcement to receive dividing partition connection and with mould on vertical edges only. Pilasters shall be anchored to the floor by means of fitting provided for vertical adjustment by direct mechanical means and not depend upon friction to hold the vertical adjustment. 4. Head rail: Pilasters shall be securely braced with continuous 1" x 1 ½" tubular steel overhead bracing (either lock seam or continuous welded) through the top of the installation and over any free standing end partition and be fastened into a cast alloy wall bracket. 5. All steel will be galvanized-bonderized stretcher leveled furniture steel of the following gauges: a. Partitions: 20 gauge. b. Pilasters: 20 gauge. c. Doors: 22 gauge. d. Head rail: 20 gauge. e. Reinforcing Channels: 16 and 14 gauge. 6. Hardware and Fitting: a. Brackets: Both wall and pilaster stirrup brackets to be enameled to match partitions. b. Pilaster Floor Trim: 3" high, stainless steel. c. Hinges: Door shall be equipped with Sanymetal #7961 concealed controlled gravity hinge.
148-294 3603 11-03 d. Coat Hooks, Latches, Bumpers: Each door to be equipped with one cast alloy chrome plated coat hook and bumper; one stop and keeper. Latch and coat hook to be applied with screws having one way heads. Balance of hardware to be applied with Phillip Head Screws. e. All Hardware shall comply with A.D.A. Requirements 7. Urinal Screens: a. Location: Men 104 & 105. b. Materials: All urinal screens shall be wall hung flush type “A” as manufactured by the Sanymetal Products Co., Inc., or equal, approved by the Architect. Screen partitions shall be 1" thick, made of # 20 gauge galvanized-bonderized steel, assembled over and cemented under pressure to a dense sound-deadening Bridgecore insulation. The two face plates shall have formed edges and shall be electrically welded together and sealed with continuous oval-crown locking strip, mitered, welded and finished at corners. Panels to have integral formed reinforced mounting flanges. 8. Finish and color: All Surfaces to be cleaned and sanded smooth preparatory to application of synthetic enamel applied in two coats, by modern mechanical methods, baked on in a uniform smooth, lustrous protective finish. Color to be selected from manufacturer’s color chart.
10162:03 - INSTALLATION A. Erect compartments and related items in a rigid, substantial manner, straight and plumb, and with all horizontal lines level. B. Clearance at the wall shall be approximately 1" for panels and 1" for pilasters. C. All drilling, cutting and fitting to room finish shall be concealed in the finished work. D. Clearance at vertical edges of doors shall be uniform from top to bottom and shall not exceed 3/16". Doors shall be free of warp and wind.
10162:04 - ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware and leave in perfect working order. B. Adjust door hinges to hold door open at approximately 30 degrees.
10162:08 - PATCHING A. Field touch-up of scratches or defaced enamel finish will be permitted only if it is approved by the Architect. B. Replace damaged, bent or defective materials.
10162:09 - CLEANING A. Remove all protective maskings and clean surfaces, leaving them free of soil and imperfection.
149-294 3603 11-03 10350 - FLAG POLES
10350:01 SCOPE A. Work included: Provide all labor, materials and incidentals necessary to install flag poles and make this section complete.
10350:02 MATERIALS: A. Flag Poles 1. Shall be equal to Model S 25060188 “Sentry” as Manufactured by Concord Industries, Inc. 800-527-3902, www.flagpoles.com 2. Flag Poles shall be 25'-0" exposed height. 3. Flag Poles shall have rope based interior halyard system. 4. Finish shall be clear anodized finish. 5. Foundation Sleeve: Fabricated from hot dip galvanized steel with a steel base plate whose square dimension is at least twice the butt diameter of the shaft. The base plate shall be securely welded to the ground spike. The ground spike shall be 3/4" diameter, not less than 18" long.
10350:03 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s directions for a ground mounted installation. B. Verify Final Location with Architect Prior to installation.
150-294 3603 11-03 10400 - IDENTIFYING DEVICES
10400:01 - SCOPE A. Work Included: Provide all labor, materials, and incidentals necessary for completion of this section.
10400:02 - MATERIALS A. Plastic Name Plates 1. Material: The plates shall be 1/8" phenolic plastic laminated base. Backgrounds shall have a hand polish finish. Letters to be cut into the surface, exposing the contrasting color core submitted. Plates shall be of height and length as required for letters. Letters to be approximately 7/8" high, attached with cement. Plates shall meet all ADA requirements. 2. Names required and locations: a. Doors - 4, 15, 26: Men and Doors - 3, 14, 23: Women, Symbol of accessibility use tactile characters and symbols. 3. Handicap Parking Signs: a. Locate as shown on Site Plan. b. To read: Handicap Parking Only - Shall meet all ADA Requirements. c. Sign Pole Mounted. d. Three Signs Required - Two Signs Van Parking. B. Cast Letters: 1. Cast letters shall be equal to those manufactured by the Southwell Co., Box 299, San Antonio, Texas 78291-0299. 2. Letters shall be 6" high, Futura S-902 Style. 3. Letters shall be aluminum with a bronze duranodic finish. 4. Letters shall be mounted with P-1 Projected Mounting. 5. Refer to elevations and yard sign for wording and location.
151-294 3603 11-03 10520 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
10520:01 - SCOPE A. Work Included: Provide all labor, materials and incidentals necessary to make this section complete.
10520:02 - MATERIALS
A. Fire Extinguisher Cabinet: Shall be equal to Academy (aluminum) 1825- F-11-DK Bronze anodized as manufactured by J.L.Industries, 4450 Rauenhorst Circle, Bloomington, Minnesota 55435, (612) 835-6850. B. Cabinet to have fill glass door of clear plate glass, with anodized handle. C. Size to be 10 1/2" wide x 24" high x 5 1/2" deep recessed with 1 1/2" flat trim return. D. Fire Extinguisher: Shall be equal to Cosmic 5E: Multi-purpose dry chemical 5 lb. ABC fire extinguisher as manufactured by J. L. Industries.
10520:03 - INSTALLATION A. Install as shown on Drawings and as recommended by manufacturer. B. Location as shown on Drawings. 2 required.
152-294 3603 11-03 10800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES
10800:01 - SCOPE A. Work Included: Provide all metal toilet accessories with necessary incidentals to make this section complete. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Installation of Toilet Accessories: Section 06200
10800:02 - MATERIALS A. Toilet Paper Holder: (Recessed) 1. Locations: One in each of the following: Women - 117 Men - 118 2. Material: Equal to Bobrick No. B-6687, Recess toilet paper holder with hood for single roll, Satin Finish. B. Toilet Paper Holder: Surface 1. Location: one in each stall of the following: Women: 103 & 106 Men: 104 & 105 2. Material: Equal to Bobrick No. 27460 Surface Mounted Toilet Tissue Dispenser for Two Rolls. C. Paper Towel dispenser and Waste Disposal: 1. Location: One in each of the following: Women - 117 Men - 118 2. Material: Equal to Bobrick No. B- 369, Recessed Combination paper towel dispenser and waste disposal, Satin Finish. D. Grab Bars: 1. Location: One in of the following: Women 103, 106, & 117 Men 104, 105 & 118 2. Material: Equal to Bobrick No. B-5507 series Grab bar: One - B-5507 x 36" with 256 or 257 series anchor plate as required. One - B-5507 x 42" with 256 or 257 series anchor plate as required. E. Mirrors: 1. Location: Locate mirror at lavatory in the following toilet: Women 117 Men 118 2. Material: Equal to Bobrick B-166 - 2436 F. Stainless Steel Mirrors: 1. Location: Locate mirror at lavatory in the following Toilet: Women 103 - 106 Men 104 - 105 2. Material: Equal to Bobrick B - 1556 - 2436. G. Soap Dispenser: 1. Locations: one at lavatory in the following toilet: Women 103 & 106 Men 104 & 105
153-294 3603 11-03
2. Material: Equal to Bobrick No. B-4063 Recessed Soap Dispenser. H. Baby Changing Station: 1. Locations: one in each of the following: Women 103 Men 104 2. Material: Equal to KB 100-01 Horizontal Baby Changing Station as Manufactured by Koala Corporation - Phone 888-763-3456, FAX: 303-574-9000.
154-294 3603 11-03
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
SPECIAL NOTE
• The Architectural and Structural Plans and Specifications, including the supplements issued thereto, Information to Bidders, and other pertinent documents issued by the Owner, are a part of these specifications and the accompanying mechanical and electrical plans, and shall be complied with in every respect. All the above is included herewith, will be issued separately or is on file at the Owner’s office, and shall be examined by all bidders. Failure to comply shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility or be used as a basis for additional compensation due to omission of drawings. Where the Supplementary General Conditions conflict with the General Conditions, the Supplementary General Conditions shall govern.
• All work covered by this division of the specifications shall be accomplished in accordance with all applicable provisions of the contract documents and any addenda or directive which may be issued.
• The mechanical Contractor shall familiarize himself with the General Provisions for Electrical, Section 16000, and comply with those requirements which affect his work.
CHECKING DOCUMENTS
• The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. The Contractor shall check the drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Owner of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Owner will promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the contract documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete contract documents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
• All plumbing work shall be in accordance with the requirements of the International Plumbing Code, 2000 Edition.
• All mechanical work shall be in accordance with the requirements of the International Mechanical Code, 2000 Edition.
• Buy American Act: Only domestic construction materials will be used by the Contractor, Subcontractors, materialmen, and suppliers in the performance of this contract.
155-294 3603 11-03
• Equipment Vibration Tolerance:
• After air balance work is completed and permanent drive sheaves are in place, perform field mechanical balancing and adjustments required to meet the specified vibration tolerance.
• Products Criteria:
• Standard Products: Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least 3 years. See other specification sections for any exceptions.
• Equipment Service: Products shall be supported by a service organization which maintains an adequate inventory of repair parts and is located within a one hundred mile radius of the site.
• Multiple Units: When two or more units of materials or equipment of the same type or class are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer.
• Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use components made by others, assume complete responsibility for the final assembled product.
• Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer’s name or identifiable trademark shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast integrally with equipment, stamped or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment.
• Manufacturer’s Recommendations: Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the Architect prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material.
LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES
• All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Owner, shall prepare any supplemental drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so
156-294 3603 11-03
as to comply and, on approval, make the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance.
TERMINOLOGY
• Whenever the words “furnish”, “provide”, “furnish and install,” “provide and install”, and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to the contrary.
• Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to furnish and install the material.
• The use of the word “shall” conveys a mandatory condition to the contract.
• “This section” always refers to the section in which the statement occurs.
• “The project” includes all work in progress during the construction period.
• “Concealed” areas are those areas which cannot be seen by the building occupants from the floor with all building components in place.
• “Exposed” areas are all areas which are exposed to view by the building occupants including mechanical rooms.
• In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items.
ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION:
• The work, from its commencement to its completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor, and all risks in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor.
• The Engineer’s efforts during periodic site visits will be directed toward assisting the Architect in providing assurance for the Owner that the completed project will conform to the requirements of the contract documents, but the Engineers will not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to perform the work in accordance with contract documents.
• The Engineer will make recommendations to the Architect regarding disapproval or rejection of work which, in his opinion, is defective, i.e.; is unsatisfactory, faulty or defective, or does not conform to the requirements of the contract documents. Failure on the part of the Engineer to recommend disapproval of or rejection of
157-294 3603 11-03
work, methods, or acts or omissions of any kind shall never at any time be deemed to constitute acceptance or approval of the same.
GENERAL
• In general, the lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under these specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of various lines and ducts and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating from these standards.
• All piping, conduit and ductwork for the mechanical and electrical trades shall be concealed in chases in finished areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas that have ceilings shall be run concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise specifically indicated or directed.
• Piping, ductwork, conduits and raceways may be run exposed in machinery and equipment spaces, where serving as connections to motors and equipment items in finished rooms where exposed connections are required, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or required.
• All conduits in any space where they are exposed shall run parallel with the building walls. They shall enter the concealed areas perpendicular with the walls, ceilings or floors. Fittings shall be used where necessary to comply with this requirement.
• The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor’s unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts in masonry walls while they are under construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction.
• The mechanical and electrical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact location, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the Architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. Each Contractor shall verify that each item of mechanical equipment, each electrical panel, light fixture, and device, each grille or ceiling outlet, and each other item of work furnished by him shall fit into the available space before ordering same. Any required changes due to the Contractor’s failure to verify that each item of his equipment will fit into the available space shall be made by the Contractor furnishing the equipment, all at no additional cost to the Owner.
158-294 3603 11-03
• The routing of piping, ductwork, conduits, etc., indicated on the drawings is approximate and where light fixtures or other items of work are to be recessed in ceiling, piping, ductwork, conduits, etc., shall be routed around the light fixtures or other items of work where there is not sufficient space for same to be routed above such item of work with the recessed item properly installed. Any required changes due to the Contractor’s failure to properly coordinate his work with recessed items shall be made by the Contractor installing such piping, ductwork, conduits, etc., all at no additional cost to the Owner.
• The electrical plans show diagrammatically the locations of the various electrical outlets and apparatus and the method of circuiting and controlling them. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing-in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections, and in all cases shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. The Owner reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or apparatus before installation (within 10 feet of location shown on drawings) or after installation if an obvious conflict exists, without additional cost to the Owner.
• The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Owner before the work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds.
• Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, material, and conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The following order shall govern:
• Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site.
• Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances.
• Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets.
• Piping, ducts, and conduits serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner. All piping, ductwork, conduits and all other items of work supported from the structure above shall be installed as high as physically possible (not just as convenient) considering all work required to be installed in the available space. If any such work is installed lower than it could have been 159-294 3603 11-03
installed, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and materials to remove same and reinstall the work as high as possible, all at no additional cost to the Owner.
• Adequate provisions shall be provided for the replacement of all filters.
• In addition to insulation called for elsewhere in the specifications, all piping and equipment subject to condensation and/or whose normal operating surface temperature is below 70 degrees F or above 110 degrees F shall be insulated. All piping subject to condensation and/or whose operating temperature is below 70 degrees F shall be insulated same as specified elsewhere in the specifications for chilled water or refrigerant suction line piping. All piping with operating surface temperature above 110 degrees F shall be insulated same as specified elsewhere in the specifications for domestic hot water or steam piping. All insulation shall be provided by the particular Contractor who installs the particular equipment or piping system. All equipment shall be insulated and finished in a manner suitable for the conditions and as approved by the Engineers. Armaflex insulations shall not be permitted in breathing air spaces.
• Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Owner’s attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment.
• The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not.
• Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 or 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective “M”, “P” or “E” drawings, he shall notify the Owner in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the specifications.
DIMENSIONS
• Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Owner for consideration before proceeding with the work.
INSPECTION OF SITE
160-294 3603 11-03
• The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing mechanical and electrical installations. The bidders for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to met and the work to be accomplished in removing and codifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and underground serving to and from that structure. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing installations and/or installing any new work.
ELECTRICAL WIRING
• All electric wiring of every character, both for power supply, for pilot and control, for temperature control, for communications, etc. will be done under Division 16 of these specifications. The Contractor for each section shall erect all his motors in place ready for connections. The Contractor, under Division 16, shall mount all the starters and controls, furnishing the supporting structures and any required outlet boxes.
• Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern.
MOTORS AND CONTROLS
• All motors furnished under any of the several sections of these specifications shall be of recognized manufacture, of adequate capacity for the loads involved and wound for the current characteristics shown on the electrical drawings. All motors shall conform to the standards of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association as shown in their latest publications. They shall further be listed by Underwriters Laboratories.
• Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor under Division 16 shall furnish each motor with a starter and all controls of the types specified or required. The starters shall be of the totally enclosed type, of capacity rating within the required limits of the motors which they are to serve, shall be suitable for the motor current characteristics and shall provide thermal overload protection. All starters shall be of standard manufacture and performance as defined by the National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association. They further shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Provide overload protection in each phase wire.
• All motors larger than 1/3 horsepower shall be of a type that the power consumed is in approximate direct proportion to the load on the motor. At 50% of rated brake
161-294 3603 11-03
horsepower, the power consumed shall be approximately 50% of the power consumed at full load.
TESTING
• The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform the various tests as specified and required by the Owner and as required by the State and local authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making test.
PAINTING
• Painting for Divisions 15 and 16 shall be as follows:
• If the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and then given one coat of half-flat-half-enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory prime surfaces.
SEALING AROUND PIPES, CONDUITS, DUCTS, ETC.
• The Contractor installing pipes, conduits, ducts, etc. shall seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where they pierce walls, partitions or floors with Dow Corning No. 2000 fire resistant caulk. The packing shall effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions.
MECHANICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS:
• Prepare and submit a set of coordination drawings showing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other building components. Prepare drawings to an accurate scale of 1/4”=1’-0” or larger. Indicate the locations of all equipment and materials, including clearances for installing and maintaining insulation, servicing and maintaining equipment, valve stem movement, and similar requirements. Indicate movement and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction.
• Prepare floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, and details to conclusively coordinate and integrate all installations. Indicate locations where space is limited, and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following:
• Mechanical equipment room layouts;
• Specific equipment installations, including: 162-294 3603 11-03
• Pumps and air handling units • Temperature control panels • Work in pipe spaces, chases, trenches, and tunnels • Exterior wall penetrations • Ceiling plenums which contain piping, ductwork, or equipment in congested arrangement • Installations in mechanical riser shafts, at typical sections and crucial offsets and junctures • Pipe expansion loops • Numbered valve location diagrams • Manifold piping for multiple equipment units
• It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Owner to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use.
• These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided to the Owner for his information.
ROUGH-IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT
• The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications. The Contractor under each section of the specifications shall rough-in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The Contractor shall refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required equipment connections for the Owner furnished equipment.
• Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Owner and finally connect as directed by the Owner.
• Should any shop drawings not be available for equipment furnished under other contracts or by the Owner, the Contractor under each section of these specifications shall bid the work as detailed on the drawings.
• Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not constitute grounds for additional payment to the Contractor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
MARKING OF PIPE
163-294 3603 11-03
• The Contractor shall mark all accessible piping systems. The identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system by lettered legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow.
• Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, and on each drop to an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that no exposed line shall enter a room without being identified therein. Marker on lines above removable ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the lines and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible.
• Markers shall conform completely with “The Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems (ANSI A131 1981). Markers shall have ANSI specified color coded background, color of legend and legend letter size.
• Markers shall be equal to Seton Set Pipe Markers.
IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING
• The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of equipment shall indicate the same number as shown on the drawings.
• Interior Equipment: All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16” thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/2” high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information.
• Exterior (Outdoor) Equipment: Brass nameplates, with engraved black filled letters, not less than 3/16-inch high riveted or bolted to the equipment.
• Valves:
• Tags for isolation (shut-off) valves concealed in interstitial space, above ceilings or in chases: Engraved black filled numbers and letters not less than 1/2 inch high for number designation, and not less than 1/4-inch for service designation on 19 gage 1-1/2 inches round brass disc, attached with brass “S” hook or brass chain. 164-294 3603 11-03
PART 3 EXECUTION
PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS:
• Where hanger spacing does not correspond with joist or rib spacing, use structural steel channels secured directly to joist and rib structure that will correspond to the required hanger spacing, and then suspend the equipment and piping from the channels. Drill or burn holes in structural steel only with the prior approval of the Architect.
• Use chain, wire or strap hangers; wood for blocking stays and bracing; hangers suspended from piping above will not be permitted. Replace or thoroughly clean and red lead paint products that are rusty.
• Use hanger rods that are straight and vertical. Turnbuckles for vertical adjustments may be omitted where limited space prevents use. Provide a minimum of 1/2-inch clearance between pipe or pipe covering and adjacent work.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
• The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder shall, in cooperation with the representatives of the manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully instruct the Owner’s representatives in the proper operation of each item of equipment and of each system. During the balancing and adjusting of systems, the Owner’s representative shall be made familiar with all procedures.
OPERATING MANUALS
• Prepare and submit 3 copies of the operating manuals bound in hard covers. Three weeks prior to completion of the work, the Owner will check the manuals and any additional material necessary to complete the manuals shall be furnished and inserted by the Contractor.
• Manuals shall contain the following data:
• Catalogue data of all equipment. • Shop drawings of all equipment. • Wiring diagrams. • Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment. • Parts list for all items. • Name and address of each vendor.
• In addition to the information required by Division 1 for Maintenance Data, include the following information.
165-294 3603 11-03
• Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of all replaceable parts.
• Manufacturer’s printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.
• Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.
• Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
GUARANTEE
• Unless a longer guarantee is hereinafter called for, all work, material and equipment items shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after acceptance by the Owner. All defects in labor and materials occurring during this period, as determined by the Owner, shall be repaired and/or replaced to the complete satisfaction of the Owner. Guarantee shall be in writing and in triplicate.
COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS
• Before acceptance and final payment the Contractor must complete the following requirements:
• Submit Test and Balance Report. • Perform final inspection and make all corrections necessary. • Submit maintenance manuals, certificate of owner instruction, equipment warranties and receipt for loose items.
166-294 3603 11-03
15100 - SITE UTILITIES
PART 1 GENERAL
NOTE
• Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division - 1 Specifications, apply to work of this section.
SUBMITTALS
• Submit manufacturer’s data on all materials.
SCOPE
• Perform all layout, trenching, excavation, backfill, shoring and similar work and provide and install all materials and appurtenances necessary for the installation and final connection of all utilities.
EXISTING UTILITIES
• Prior to beginning work, manually locate and stake all utility lines existing at the site. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations.
• The Contractor shall not rely solely on the scale drawings in determining the scope of the work.
• The drawings are not certified surveys and are not guaranteed for accuracy of location or elevation of existing lines or completeness. Before bidding, each bidder shall be personal examination of the project satisfy himself as to the existing conditions which prevail.
• Reasonable differences in actual jobsite dimensions and the drawings shall not be considered justification for a change in the contract sum.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
• All piping materials for every purpose shall be furnished and installed as hereinafter specified.
• All pipe and fittings shall be new and unused unless specifically indicated otherwise.
167-294 3603 11-03
• Underground steel piping shall be factory coated pipe “X-Tru-Coat” or epoxy coated pipe with fittings wrapped with a double thickness of 3M Scotch “51” vinyl tape over pipe and fittings.
SANITARY SEWER
• PVC Plastic Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D3034 type PSM with a maximum SDR of 35 with elastomeric joints complying with ASTM D3212.
WATER LINES
• PVC Piping: • Lines 1-1/2” and smaller shall be Schedule 80, ASTM D1785 with tapered ends, with solvent weld fittings.
• Lines 2” and larger shall be ASTM D2241, SDR 26 with tapered ends, with elastomeric gasket bell and socket fittings conforming to requirements of AWWA C900, IPS dimensions only. Reaction blocking shall conform to NFPA 24.
GAS LINES
• Plastic Gas Piping: Polyethylene, Type III, Grade 3, (PE 3406-3408), resin conforming to ASTM D1248-7A, pipe construction conforming to ASTM D2513 (SDR 11).
• Mechanical Joints: Where steel lines connect to plastic lines 2” and smaller in size, use Continental Style 5 extra heavy duty malleable iron couplings with stiffeners.
• Flanges: Where steel lines valves or accessories connect to plastic lines 2-1/2” and larger, use polyethylene and steel flat face flanges with full face gaskets.
• Casing: Encase plastic lines under streets in schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe extending 36” beyond paving.
• Service Risers: Wayne Manufacturing compression service riser with anode and built- in stiffener.
EXTERIOR CLEANOUTS
• Provide and install cleanouts in exterior sewer lines where shown or as required by ordinance but not greater than 80 ft. apart. Cleanouts shall consist of a concrete encased special fitting with sewer pipes extending therefrom upward, terminating in a concrete slab. A brass countersunk cleanout ferrule shall be set on this slab in such manner as to be flush with finished grade and to provide access, through its cover, to the cleanout. Cleanouts shall be the same size as the sewer, up to 6” in size, and 4” on 6” and larger sizes.
168-294 3603 11-03
GATE VALVES IN EXTERIOR WATER LINES
• Buried Valves: Buried valves shall meet the requirements of AWWA standard C500- 61. Design working pressure shall be 175 psi and the valves shall be double disc gate valves with non-rising stems. Valves shall have mechanical joint ends except where flanged ends are shown on the drawings. Valve stems shall be furnished with O-ring seals. All valves shall open by turning counter clockwise.
• Valve Boxes: Cast iron valve boxes shall be furnished for each underground valve. 6” cast iron pipe sections shall be used for box extensions where required. Each box shall have a cast iron cover and shall have a flange type base, approximately 4” larger in diameter than the outside diameter of the barrel and provided with a locking device as shown on the drawings. Anchor valve boxes with a flush 18”x18”x8” reinforced concrete collar.
• Extension Stems: Extension stems shall be provided for all buried valves where the top of the operating nut is 36” or more below finished grade. Top of the extension stems shall be not more than 18” below finished grade.
• Collar: Provide a protective concrete collar, square, dimension equal to valve cover frame plus 12” and no less than 8” thickness. Use 3,000 PSI concrete with reinforcing. Set top of cover flush with finish paving and 1” above finish grade level.
PART 3 EXECUTION
LAYOUT OF UTILITY LINES
• Before starting excavation Contractor shall:
• Uncover and determine the elevation at beginning and end terminals of each line.
• Compute and verify depth of all lines and grade of sewer lines and submit figures in writing.
• Stake route of each line.
• Arrange utility connections with authorities.
• Locate and identify any conflicting underground structures and adjust grade or routing to accommodate installation of the lines.
LAYING PIPE
169-294 3603 11-03
• Lay pipe to the lines and profiles required by conditions at the site and the drawings. Keep pipe trenches free of water and dry during the bedding, laying and jointing operations. Install fittings and valves at the required locations, with joints centered and with valve stems vertical. Handle pipe carefully to avoid damage to dimensioned ends. Remove pipe with damaged ends which cannot be suitably repaired. Keep interior of piping and accessories clean.
• Proximity of Water and Sewer Lines: Unless otherwise required by drawings, lay parallel water lines and sewer lines in separate trenches at least 5 feet apart. Insofar as possible place water line at a higher elevation than the sewer. Where water lines and sewer lines cross each other, the water line shall be at least 3 feet above the sewer, or if this is not possible, amount of clearance between the lines may be reduced to 12” out to out clearance provided the sewer line is cast iron for at least 10 feet on each side of the water line.
EXCAVATION FOR OUTSIDE UTILITIES
• The Contractor shall perform any excavations of every description and of whatever substances encountered, to the depths indicated on the drawings and/or required for the installation of his work.
• Trench Width: The minimum width of the trench shall be the outside diameter of the pipe plus 12” and the maximum width shall be the outside diameter of the pipe plus 18”. The trenching equipment shall be maintained on a sufficiently level road bed to provide substantially vertical trench walls from bottom of trench to the top of the trench.
• Trench Excavation: The trench shall be excavated to the depth required so as to provide a uniform and continuous bearing and support for the pipe on solid and undisturbed ground. There shall be no classification of or extra payment for excavated materials, and all materials encountered shall be excavated as required.
• Bury: Nonmetallic pipe shall be buried with 36” minimum cover, metallic pipe shall have minimum 24” cover.
• Bracing and Sheeting: Open-cut trenches shall be sheeted and braced as required by OSHA and the Sate of Texas Open Trench Act as may be necessary for the safety of the workmen or protection of property. This provision shall be strictly enforced for all trenches greater than 5 feet in depth.
• Barricades and Safety Provisions: To protect persons for injury and to avoid property damage, adequate barricades, construction signs, warning lights and guards as required shall be placed and maintained during progress of the construction work. All material, piles, equipment, pipe, and open trenches that may serve as hazards to vehicular or pedestrian traffic shall be protected by barricades or fences and warning lights.
170-294 3603 11-03
BACKFILLING
• The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed and until the utilities systems as installed conform to the requirements specified hereinafter. The trenches shall be carefully backfilled with the excavation materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel, soft shale, or other approved materials free from large clods of earth or stones deposited in thoroughly and carefully rammed 6” layers, until the pipe has a cover of not less than one foot for water mains and two feet where possible for other lines.
• The remainder of the backfill material shall then be thrown into the trench, moistened and tamped in one foot layers. Blasted rock, broken concrete or pavement, and large boulders shall not be used as backfill material. Settling the backfill with water will be permissible and will be a requirement when so directed. Any trenches improperly backfilled or where settlement occurs, shall be reopened to the depth required for proper compaction, then refilled and mounded over, and smoothed off.
• Open trenches across roadways or other areas to be paved shall be backfilled as specified above, except that the entire depth of the trench shall be backfilled in 6” layers, each layer moistened and compacted to a density at least equal to that of the surrounding earth in such manner as to permit the rolling and compaction of the filled trench together with the adjoining earth to provide the required bearing value, so that paving of the area can proceed immediately after backfilling is completed. Along all other portions of the trenches, the ground shall be graded to a reasonable uniformity and the mounding over the trenches left in a uniform and neat condition.
OPENING AND RECLOSING PAVEMENT
• Where excavation requires the opening of existing walks, streets, drives or other existing pavement, that pavement shall be cut as required to install new lines and to make new connections to existing lines. The sizes of the cut shall be held to a minimum, consistent with the work to be completed and when the excavation has been backfilled, the paving shall be patched, using materials to match those cut out. The patches shall thoroughly bond with the original surfaces and shall be level with them. Quality of the patch shall be equal to or better than adjacent paving.
UTILITY SERVICES
• Water Service: The Contractor shall arrange with the city for a new meter and water service at the point(s) shown on the drawings. Refer to the drawings for details. Pay any charges levied by the city for this connection.
171-294 3603 11-03
• Sanitary Sewer: If necessary, the Contractor shall arrange with the city for sewer service at the point shown on the drawings. Pay any charges levied by the city for this connection. Refer to the drawings for details.
• Gas: The Contractor shall arrange with gas utility company for new meter(s) as shown on the drawings. Pay any charges levied by the utility for this connection. From the location of the new meter, extend service to the building. Provide service valves at each service point. Refer to the drawings for details.
• Electricity: The Contractor shall arrange with West Texas Utilities Co. for new work as shown on the drawings. Pay any charges levied by the utility for this connection. Refer to the drawings for details and Section 16420.
TESTING
• Sewer: Prior to testing for leakage the trench shall be backfilled up to at least the lower half of the pipe. If required, sufficient additional backfill shall be placed to prevent pipe movement during testing, leaving the joints uncovered to permit inspection. Visible leaks encountered shall be corrected. Test shall be made by filling the line to be tested with water so that a head of at least 10 feet is provided above the top of the pipe at the upper end of the pipe line to be tested. The filled line shall be allowed to stand not less than 4 hours.
• Water Lines Soldered or Flanged: Test under hydrostatic pressure of 150 PSIG for 4 hours with no leaks and no pressure drop.
• Gas: Before backfilling, test under air pressure at 15 PSIG for 24 hours. There shall be no pressure drop, except for correction for temperature variation. If any pressure drop occurs, soap test every joint, correct the leaks and retest.
172-294 3603 11-03
15110 - NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
• Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including GENERAL and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS and DIVISION 1 SPECIFICATION SECTIONS apply to this Section.
• Section 15000, GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL.
• Section 15100, SITE UTILITIES.
SUMMARY
• This Section specifies distribution piping systems for natural gas within the building and extending from the point of delivery to the connections with gas utilization devices. Piping materials and equipment specified in this Section include:
• Pipes, fittings, and specialties;
• Special duty valves.
DEFINITIONS
• Pipe sizes used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS).
• Point of Delivery is the outlet of the service meter assembly.
• Gas Service Piping: The pipe from the gas main or other source of supply including the meter, to the gas entry.
• Gas Entry: The cut-off valve and regulator assembly between the gas service piping and the gas distribution piping.
• Gas Distribution Piping: Piping generally within the building which conveys gas from the gas entry to the points of usage.
SUBMITTALS
• Product Data: Include gas piping specialties and special duty valves. Include rated capacities of selected models, furnished specialties and accessories, and installation instructions.
173-294 3603 11-03
• Maintenance Data: For gas specialties and special duty valves, for inclusion in operating and maintenance manual specified in Division 1 and Division-15 Section “Basic Mechanical Requirements.”
• Quality Control Submittals:
• Welder’s Qualification certificates.
• Submit test reports specified in Part 3 of this Section.
• Gas Pressure Regulators.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
• Installer Qualifications: Installation and replacement of gas piping, gas utilization equipment or accessories, and repair and servicing of equipment shall be performed only by a qualified installer. The term qualified means experienced in such work (experienced shall mean having a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this project), familiar with precautions required, and has completed with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Upon request, submit evidence of such qualifications to the Architect.
• Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators: Comply with the requirements of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, “Welding and Brazing Qualification.”
• Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the requirements of the following codes:
• NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code, for gas piping materials and components, gas piping installations, and inspection, testing, and purging of gas piping systems.
• International Mechanical Code, 1998 Edition.
EXTRA MATERIALS
• Valve Wrenches: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, 2 valve wrenches for each type of gas valve installed, requiring same.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
174-294 3603 11-03
• Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering gas piping system products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Gas Cocks:
Jenkins Bros. Lunkenheimer Co. NIBCO, Inc. Powell Co. Stockham.
PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS
• General: Refer to Part 3, Article “PIPE APPLICATION” for identification of systems where the below specified pipe and fitting materials are used.
• Steel Pipe: ASTM A 120, Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe, beveled ends.
• Polyethylene Pipe: Nipak, designed and tested specifically for natural gas piping.
FITTINGS
• Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, for threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1.
• Joint Compound: suitable for the gas being handled.
• Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234, seamless or welded, for welded joints.
• Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connection and facing:
• Material Group: 1.1.
• End Connections: Butt Welding.
• Facings: Raised face.
• Gasket Material: thickness, material, and type suitable for gas to be handled, and for design temperatures and pressures.
• Polyethylene Fittings: Nipak, designed and tested specifically for natural gas piping.
PIPING SPECIALTIES
175-294 3603 11-03
• Unions: ANSI B16.39, Class 150, black malleable iron; female pattern; brass to iron seat; ground joint.
• Dielectric Unions: ANSI B16.39, Class 250; malleable iron and cast bronze; with end connections suitable for pipe to joined; designed to isolate galvanic and stray current corrosion.
• Protective Coating: When steel piping will be buried, or in contact with material or atmosphere exerting a corrosive action, pipe and fittings shall be mill wrapped. Materials to be incorporated in mill wrap (from surface of pipe outward) are as follows:
• Semi-plasticized coal tar enamel.
• Glass fiber mat.
• Semi-plasticized coat tar enamel.
• Coal tar saturated pipeline felt.
• Semi-plasticized coal tar enamel.
• 70 lb. Kraft paper.
VALVES
• General duty valves (i.e., gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves) are specified in Division-15 Section “Valves.” Special duty valves are specified in this Article by their generic name; refer to Part 3 below, Article “VALVE APPLICATION” specific uses and applications for each valve specified.
• Gas Cocks 2 Inch and Smaller: 150 PSI WOG, bronze body, straight-away pattern, square head, threaded ends.
• Gas Cocks 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: MSS Sp-78; 175 PSI, lubricated plug type, semi-steel body, single gland wrench operated, flanged ends.
• Gas Line Pressure Regulators: single stage, steel jacketed, corrosion-resistant gas pressure regulators; with atmospheric vent, elevation compensator; with threaded ends for 2 inch and larger; for inlet and outlet gas pressures, specific gravity, and volume flow indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
PIPING APPLICATIONS AND INSTALLATIONS
176-294 3603 11-03
• General: Install piping to conform with the requirements NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.
• All gas piping and connections to all gas consuming equipment shall be by the Plumbing Contractor.
• Gas piping inside building and above roof and not exposed to soil shall be of black steel pipe and fittings with threaded connections on smaller than 1-1/2” joints and fittings and at equipment connections. All other joints and fittings shall be welded.
• Where gas piping runs under floor slabs, or other concrete slabs, or asphalt paving, the piping shall be encased inside another pipe not less than two (2) pipe sizes larger than the gas line with both ends of larger pipe beveled and welded to smaller pipe with gas tight welds. The outer pipe shall be vented to the atmosphere outside the building with a 2” diameter pipe extended 30 inches above grade with an inverted “U” with open end turned down. Provide insect screen in open end of vent. All pipe (inner, outer, and vent pipe) shall be black steel pipe and fittings. The envelope shall terminate six (6) inches above the floor slab inside the building wall or two (2) feet exterior of building wall or end of slab. Vent pipe shall be adjacent to building wall, unless indicated otherwise on the plans. Both gas piping and envelope shall be tested individually after being in place with 100 PSI air pressure for 24 hours before concrete floor is poured and test approved by the Architect.
• Where governing codes permit, gas piping exterior of buildings shall be Nipak polyethylene pipe and fitting designed and tested specifically for natural gas piping. The Nipak pipe shall have a minimum ground cover of 3’-0”. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Care shall be taken not to backfill sharp rocks or frozen earth clogs directly onto plastic piping. Plastic piping shall not be laid directly on logs, rocks, gravel, or other abrasive or solid objects. No Cathodic protection is required for Nipak polyethylene gas piping. Provide tracer wire spirally wrapped around Nipak in accordance with local gas company’s recommendations.
• Where governing codes do not permit Nipak polyethylene pipe, all gas piping exterior of building and exposed to soil shall be new, domestic, Schedule 40, black steel mill wrapped pipe with welded joints and fittings except where indicated or specified otherwise.
• The mill wrapping shall be as follows:
• The pipe shall be mechanically cleaned and primed.
• Next, a flood coat of semi-plasticized coal tar enamel shall be applied. The coal tar enamel shall be an average thickness of 177-294 3603 11-03
3/32” for pipes to and including 1-1/2” diameter and 4/32” for pipes 2” and larger.
• The pipe shall next be spiral wrapped with glass fiber mat.
• Next, flood of semi-plasticized coal tar enamel to an average thickness of 1/32” shall be applied.
• The pipe shall next be spiral wrapped with coal tar saturated asbestos pipeline felt.
• The seal coat of semi-plasticized coal tar enamel shall be applied.
• The pipe shall next be spiral wrapped with 70 lb. Kraft paper.
• An electrical holiday inspection shall then be made of all pipe wrapping.
• Care shall be taken in handling and installing mill wrapped pipe so as not to damage the wrapping. Any damaged areas of pipe wrapping shall be repaired as hereinafter specified.
• Welded Joints:
• Heat enamel to a state of relatively free flowing consistency. Stir enamel at regular intervals during melting process. Reduce heat when enamel starts to throw off a yellow-brown smoke.
• Clean scale from weld with hammer. Clean pipe surface with wire brush. Wipe dry if wet. Burn off any oil spots with torch.
• Apply one coat of primer with brush.
• Remove Kraft paper back two or three inches from ends of felt wrapping.
• Cut a length of felt wrapping lone enough to overlap approximately 3” when wound around pipe.
• Place length of felt wrapping under and around joint in the form of a sling. Hold felt firmly against bottom of pipe to prevent excess enamel from accumulating in the sling under the pipe and spilling.
• Pour sufficient hot enamel along top exposed pipe to cause the enamel to flow around the pipe, gently sliding the wrapping sling a
178-294 3603 11-03
short distance back and forth laterally to insure full paint coverage along the bottom of the pipe.
• When full coverage is attained, pull felt wrapping firmly around pipe to point of overlap; apply more enamel to felt to be overlapped and press overlapping end firmly into place. This operation must be completed before enamel has stiffened too much for a bond between enamel and wrapping to be achieved.
• CAUTION: Men doing this work wear gloves to protect their hands against possible burns from hot paint.
• Taps:
• Heat from welding taps on a pipe causes the enamel to overheat and flow toward the bottom of the pipe. This area must be repaired by removing the damaged enamel and felt and replacing with enamel and felt in this same manner as for welded joints. Notch the felt in order to secure a snug fit around the tap.
• The tap shall be wrapped the same as described for the main pipe.
• Damaged Coating: All damage to coating should be repaired.
• When coating has been damaged sufficiently to expose the pipe, clean the exposed pipe and apply primer if original primer coat has been destroyed.
• Apply a flood coat of enamel to the exposed surface.
• The newly coated area should be covered with a piece of felt wrapper, when it is needed to contain the enamel within the damaged area. The felt should be installed while the enamel is still in a molten state to obtain a bond between the felt and enamel.
• General: Avoid overheating the enamel. Excessive heat carbonizes the enamel which reduces its effectiveness as a high resistance coating. Take all necessary precautions to prevent persons from coming in contact with the hot enamel.
• Inspection of Wrapping: Prior to backfilling of ditch containing gas piping, the Contractor shall obtain an inspection of all wrapped pipe from the gas utility company and shall provide all labor and materials required to comply with their recommendations.
• Cathodic protection:
179-294 3603 11-03
• The Contractor shall furnish and install, where indicated on the plans, packaged magnesium anodes each with 12 feet of #6 THW sire. The wire shall be brazed to the top of the gas pipe after which the break in the pipe covering shall be coated with pipe paint and covered with felt before backfilling. Anodes shall be of the size indicated on the plans, located where indicated on the plans and installed in accordance with the detail shown on the plans. All brazing of wire leads to piping shall be by the Thermoweld or Cadweld process.
• A cast iron Buffalo type extension service box shall be furnished and installed with top flush with finished grade through which the wire from pipe to anode is looped.
• At all locations where the gas line crosses a “foreign” pipe closer than 6 inches to the “foreign” pipe, the Contractor shall furnish and install a 6” X 6” X 1/16 rigid fiber glass insulating spacer between the “foreign” pipe and the gas line. Continuous rigid fiberglass insulating spacer shall be provided between gas line and any “foreign” pipe running parallel with and closer than 6” to the gas line. Plastic tape or hot pipe enamel shall be used to secure the insulating spacer to the gas line. No metal fasteners will be permitted. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish any and all labor and materials required to completely isolate (electrically) all gas piping receiving cathodic protection from all unprotected piping.
• Approximately thirty (30) days after the installation of all piping and anodes, the oil-to-pipe voltage reading shall be taken by this Contractor and the readings certified to be correct and delivered to the Owner. If any readings are obtained indicating less than .85 volts, the Owner’s attention shall be called to these readings and more extensive tests made as directed by the Engineer to determine the required corrective measures.
• Hanger, supports, and anchors are specified in Division-15 Section “SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS. Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports:
Steel Pipe:
SIZE SPACING IN FEET
1/2 6 3/4 to 1 8 1-1/4 and larger (horizontal) 10 1-1/4 and larger (vertical) every floor level
• Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with the level side down.
180-294 3603 11-03
• Make changes in directions and branch connections using fittings.
• Install unions in pipes 2 inches and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.
• Insulating Unions and Couplings:
• This Contractor shall furnish and install an insulating union, coupling, or flange above grade from each service line to each building to isolate protected piping from building piping. Insulating flanges or coupling shall also be furnished and installed by this Contractor between the gas utility company’s distribution system and the Owner’s service line.
• Contractor shall furnish and install at any other location where cathodic protected piping joints unwrapped and unprotected piping a boltless insulating sleeve with slipped full rubber insulating gaskets and nylon insert on the end and bead tipped gasket on the other.
• Install flanges on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 inch and large connections.
PIPE JOINTS
• Welded Joints: Comply with the requirements in ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.
• Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe, fittings, and valves as follows:
• Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. Refer to NFPA 54, for guide for number and length of threads for field threading steel pipe.
• Align threads at point of assembly.
• Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads.
• Assemble joint to appropriate thread depth. When using a wrench on valves place the wrench on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded.
• Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are stripped, chipped, corroded, or otherwise damaged. If a weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be used.
181-294 3603 11-03
• Flanged Joints: Align flanges surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the only manufacturer.
VALVE APPLICATIONS
• General: The Drawings indicate valve types, locations, and arrangements.
• Shut off duty: Use gas cocks specified in Part 2 above.
VALVE INSTALLATIONS
• Install valves in accessible locations, protected from physical damage..
• Install a gas cock upstream of each gas pressure regulator.
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
• Install gas cock upstream and within 6 feet of gas appliance. Install a union or flanged connection downstream from the gas cock to permit removal of controls.
• Sediment Traps (Dirt Leg): Install a tee fitting with the bottom outlet plugged or capped as close to the inlet of the gas appliance as practical. Dirt leg shall be a minimum of 3 pipe diameters in length.
ELECTRICAL BONDING AND GROUNDING
• Install above ground portions of gas piping systems, upstream from equipment shutoff valves electrically continuous and bonded to a grounding electrode in accordance with NFPA 70 - “National Electrical Code.”
• Do not use gas piping as a grounding electrode.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
• Excavation and backfill to be provided under this Section of the Specifications. Refer to Section of Division 15 Specifications specifying excavation and backfill for requirements.
LAYING OF POLYETHYLENE PIPE
• Copper Tracer Wire: Copper tracer wires consisting of #14 AWG solid, single conductor, insulated copper wire shall be installed in the trench with all piping to permit location of the pipe with electronic detectors. The wire shall not be
182-294 3603 11-03
spiraled around the pipe nor taped to the pipe. Wire connections are to be made by stripping the insulation from the wire and soldering with rosin core solder. Solder joints shall be wrapped with rubber tape and electrical tape. At least every one thousand feet, provide a five pound magnesium anode attached to the main tracer wire by solder joint shall be wrapped with rubber tape and with electrical tape. An anode shall be attached at the end of each line.
• Magnetic markers may be used in lieu of copper tracer wire to aid in future pipe locating. Generally, install markers on 20 foot centers. If pipe is in a congested piping area, install on 10 foot centers. Prepare as-built drawing indicating exact location of magnetic markers.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
• Piping Tests: Inspect, test, and purge natural gas systems in accordance with NFPA 54, and local utility requirements.
183-294 3603 11-03
15140 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
• Pipe and equipment hangers and supports.
• Equipment bases and supports.
• Sleeves and seals.
• Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks.
RELATED SECTIONS
• Section 15260 - Piping Insulation.
• Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping.
REFERENCES
• ASME B31.1 - Power Piping
• ASME B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping
• ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping
• ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping
• ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.
• MSS SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.
• MSS SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
• MSS SP89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
• Plumbing Piping - DWV: • Conform to ASME B31.9. • Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
184-294 3603 11-03
• Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. • Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. • Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. • Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. • Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. • Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. • Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
• Plumbing Piping - Water: • Conform to ASME B31.9. • Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. • Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. • Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. • Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger. • Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. • Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll. • Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. • Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. • Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. • Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. • Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. • Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. • Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. • Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
ACCESSORIES
• Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.
INSERTS
185-294 3603 11-03
• Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
FLASHING
• Metal Flashing: 26 gage thick galvanized steel.
• Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage thick galvanized steel.
• Lead Flashing: • Waterproofing: 5 lb/sq ft sheet lead • Soundproofing: 1 lb/sq ft sheet lead.
• Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet; compatible with roofing.
• Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.
EQUIPMENT CURBS
• Fabrication: Welded 18 gage galvanized steel shell and base, mitered 3 inch cant, installed wood nailer.
SLEEVES
• Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel.
• Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel.
• Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed.
• Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.
• Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel or wood.
• Sealant: Acrylic.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
• Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
INSERTS
186-294 3603 11-03
• Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
• Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.
• Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.
• Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
• Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut flush with top of slab.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
• Support horizontal piping as scheduled. All piping shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction. Use vibration dampers where required.
• Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
• Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
• Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.
• All exposed vertical risers running near column shall be supported with beam clamps. Each line shall have supports not greater than 10’-0” on center, with additional provision that there be a support near top of riser. All supports shall be aligned.
• Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers.
• Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
• Provide sheet lead packing between hanger or support and piping.
• Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
• Perforated strap iron and wire are not acceptable hanger materials.
EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
187-294 3603 11-03
• Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 4 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment.
• Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.
• Construct supports of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.
• Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.
FLASHING
• Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.
• Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked 1 inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counterflash, and seal.
• Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device.
• Seal floor drains watertight to adjacent materials.
• Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 14 inches minimum high above roofing surface. Flash and counterflash with sheet metal; seal watertight. Attach counterflashing mechanical equipment and lap base flashing on roof curbs. Flatten and solder joints.
• Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.
SLEEVES
• Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
• Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
• Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.
• Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with stuffing insulation and caulk.
188-294 3603 11-03
Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.
• Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
SCHEDULES
HANGER ROD PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING DIAMETER Inches Feet Inches
1/2 to 1-1/4 6.5 3/8
1-1/2 to 2 10 3/8
2-1/2 to 3 10 1/2
4 to 6 10 5/8
8 to 12 14 7/8
14 and Over 20 1
PVC (All Sizes) 6 3/8
189-294 3603 11-03
15190 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
• Nameplates.
• Tags.
• Stencils.
• Pipe Markers.
REFERENCES
• ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
• Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.
• Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.
• Obtain Owner’s approval for all identification materials before installing.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
• Conform to NFPA 99 requirements for labeling and identification of gas piping systems and accessories.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NAMEPLATES
• Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on yellow background color.
TAGS
• Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches square.
190-294 3603 11-03
• Information Tags: Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or "Warning" and message; size 3-1/4 x 5-5/8 inches with grommet and self-locking nylon ties.
STENCILS
• Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: • Up to 2 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1/2 inch high letters. • 2-1/2 to 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1 inch high letters. • Over 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-3/4 inches high letters. • Ductwork and Equipment: 1-3/4 inches high letters.
• Stencil Paint: Semi-gloss enamel, colors and lettering size conforming to ASME A13.1.
PIPE MARKERS
• Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1.
• Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.
• Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.
• Plastic Underground Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
PIPING IDENTIFICATION:
• Identify all concealed piping and exposed piping by means of color coded bands and stencil and paint in accordance with the following tables: (NOTE: Not all systems may be used on this project.)
Systems Band Color Label
Domestic Cold Water Light Blue DOM-C-WTR Domestic Hot Water Supply Dark Blue DOM-H-WTR SUP Domestic Hot Water Return Dark Blue DOM-H-WTR RET Chilled Water Supply Light Green CHS Chilled Water Return Light Green CHR Heating Water Supply Dark Green HWS Heating Water Return Dark Green HWR
191-294 3603 11-03
Steam Light Gray ST (*) Condensate Light Gray COND Deionized Water Light Blue DEION-WTR Compressed Air Yellow COMP_AIR Vacuum Yellow VAC Gas Red GAS Drain Lines Black DRAIN
* On label on steam lines, include the steam pressure involved within the parenthesis.
• Install color coded bands and stencils in accordance with the following specific instructions. Stencil and color band pipes at each valve to show proper identification of pipe contents. Where several valves exist on one header, mark only the header. Provide a black arrow marker at each pipe stencil pointing away from the stencil to indicate flow direction. Use a double-ended arrow marker when flow can be in either or both directions. Apply a pipe stencil, color band, and an arrow marker with 10’ each side of each point of pipe penetration through walls, floors, or ceilings and at maximum spacing of 10’ on exposed piping and 50’ on concealed piping. Apply pipe identification on side of pipe providing the least obstructed view. On lines that are dark in color, provide white backgrounds for color bands, stencils, and arrow markers. Characters used in stencils shall be 2” high on lines 3” or more (including insulation) in diameter and 1” high on lines less than 3” in diameter. Color bands shall be 4” wide.
LOCKOUT DEVICES
• Anodized aluminum hasp with erasable label surface; size minimum 7-1/4 x 3 inches.
• Valve Lockout Devices: Lockable handle preventing access to valve operator, accepting lock shackle.
PART 3 EXECUTION
PREPARATION
• Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
INSTALLATION
• Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.
• Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
192-294 3603 11-03
• Install labels with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.
• Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location.
• Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 10 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe.
• Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags.
• Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.
• Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
• Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.
• Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
• Identify ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify with air handling unit identification number and area served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
193-294 3603 11-03
15260 - PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
• Piping insulation.
• Jackets and accessories.
RELATED SECTIONS
• Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification.
• Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.
REFERENCES
• ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation.
• ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.
• ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
• ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyurethane Thermal Insulation.
• ASTM C610 - Standard Specification for Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
• ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation.
• ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
• ASTM D1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed-Cell Foam).
• ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
• ASTM D2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
194-294 3603 11-03
• ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
• ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
• NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
• NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
• UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
• Conform to maximum flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with NFPA 255.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
• Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
• Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.
• Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
DOMESTIC HOT WATER LINES
• Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
DOMESTIC COLD WATER LINES
• Insulation: Owens-Corning Fiberglas ASJ/SSL-II molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with an all service jacket (ASJ). Vapor seal all insulation.
• Concealed Valves and Fittings: Preformed “Zeston” PVC covers over fiberglass insulation.
• Exposed Valves and Fittings: Hamfab insulation fittings.
195-294 3603 11-03
• Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
DRAIN LINES
• Manufacturer: Manville Type II “Aerotube”. • Substitutions: Permitted.
• Insulation: May be slit flange type.
REFRIGERATION SUCTION LINES
• Manufacturer: Manville Type II “Aerotube”. • Substitutions: Permitted.
• Insulation: Thread onto piping during fabrication and seal with adhesive.
PART 3 EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
• Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
• Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
INSTALLATION
• Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
• Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
• Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints.
• Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: • Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. • Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
196-294 3603 11-03
• For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
• For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F , insulate flanges and unions at equipment.
• Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: • Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. • Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
• Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
• Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping.
• Buried Piping: Provide factory fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose service jacket with self-sealing lap, and asphalt impregnated open mesh glass fabric, with one mil thick aluminum foil sandwiched between three layers of bituminous compound; outer surface faced with a polyester film.
SCHEDULES
• Plumbing Systems: • Domestic Hot Water Supply: • Glass Fiber Insulation: • Thickness: 1 inch.
• Domestic Cold Water Supply In Areas Subject to Freezing: • Glass Fiber Insulation: • Pipe Size Range: All sizes. • Thickness: 1/2 inch.
• Condensate Drain Lines: • Thickness: 3/8 inch.
• Refrigerant Suction: • Thickness: 3/4 inch.
197-294 3603 11-03
15270 - DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
• Duct thermal and acoustic insulation.
RELATED WORK
• Section 15260: Piping and Equipment Insulation
JOB CONDITIONS
• Deliver material to job site in original non-broken factory packing, labeled with manufacture’s density and thickness.
• Perform work at ambient and equivalent temperatures as recommended by the adhesive manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
• Johns - Manville
• Armstrong
• Owens - Corning
GENERAL
• Adhesives and Insulation Materials: Composite fire and smoke hazard ratings maximum 25 for Flame Spread and 50 for Smoke Developed. Adhesives to be waterproof.
MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
• Wrapped Ducts: Flexible fibrous glass insulation “K” value at 75 degrees F maximum 0.26 btu/in.sq.ft./degrees F/hr. with factory applied reinforced aluminum foil vapor barrier.
• Thermal and Acoustic Lining: Fiberglass insulation with “K” value at 75 degrees F maximum 0.25 btu/in.sq.ft./ degrees F/hr. absolute roughness of exposed surface not to exceed 0.0013, coated to prevent fiber erosion at air velocities up to 4,000 fpm, 1.5 lbs./cu.ft. minimum density.
198-294 3603 11-03
PART 3 EXECUTION
PREPARATION
• Ensure insulation is continuous through inside walls. Pack around ducts with fire proof self-supporting insulation material, properly sealed.
• Thermal and Acoustic Lining:
• Apply to interior of supply and return ducts as indicated. • For acoustically lined or internally insulated duct, outside duct dimensions are shown in parenthesis. • Secure to ductwork with adhesive using 50% coverage and 12 gage impale anchor tabs on 16 inch centers; all leading edges shall have fasteners at each corner and @ 8” o.c. maximum. • Use 1 inch thick insulation unless otherwise noted. • Ducts with acoustic insulation do not require external insulation. • All concealed rectangular ducts may be wrapped in lieu of internally lined at Contractor’s option.
• Wrapped Diffuser Boots:
• Provide mechanical fasteners at 18” centers maximum, to secure insulation to ducts 24” wide and wider. • Butt insulation and seal joints and breaks with 2 inch lap of foil adhered over joint.
INSULATION THICKNESS SCHEDULE
• Supply & Return Plenums 1” Liner
• Supply & Return Ducts 1” Liner
• Sheet Metal Take-Offs 1” Wrapped and Boots to Diffusers
199-294 3603 11-03
15410 - PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
• Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems. • Sanitary sewer. • Domestic water. • Natural gas.
RELATED SECTIONS
• Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification.
• Section 15260 - Piping Insulation.
REFERENCES
• AGA Z21.22 - Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices for Hot Water Supply Systems.
• ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
• ASME B31.1 - Power Piping.
• ASME B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping.
• ASME B31.9 - Building Service Piping.
• ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.
• ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
• ASTM B42 - Seamless Copper Pipe.
• ASTM B68 - Seamless Copper Tube (ASTM B68M - Seamless Copper Tube.
• ASTM B75 - Seamless Copper Tube (ASTM B75M - Seamless Copper Tube.
• ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube (ASTM B88M - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
• ASTM B280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service.
200-294 3603 11-03
• ASTM D1785 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
• ASTM D2241 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series).
• ASTM D2466 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.
• ASTM D2513 - Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing and Fittings.
• ASTM D2564 - Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
• ASTM D2609 - Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe.
• ASTM D2665 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings.
• ASTM D2729 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
• ASTM D2855 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.
• ASTM F679 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
• ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.
• AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains.
• AWWA C900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 in. Through 12 in. for Water Distribution.
• MSS SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.
• MSS SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
• MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends.
• NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
• Perform Work in accordance with Crockett County and State of Texas standards.
201-294 3603 11-03
• Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
• Identify pipe with marking including size, water pressure rating.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
• Perform Work in accordance with State of Texas Plumbing Code, and the 2000 International Plumbing Code.
• Conform to code for installation of backflow prevention devices.
• Provide certificate of compliance from the State of Texas indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
• Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
• Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.
• Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
• Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
SANITARY SEWER PIPING
• PVC Pipe: ASTM D3034 SDR 35. • Fittings: PVC. • Joints: ASTM F477, elastomeric gaskets.
• PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034. • Fittings: PVC. • Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
WATER PIPING, BELOW GRADE
• Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, hard drawn, Type K.
202-294 3603 11-03
• Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze. • Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.
WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
• Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. • Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. • Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.
CONDENSATE DRAIN LINES
• Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. • Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.
NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING
• Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 Schedule 40 black. • Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M with AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. • Joints: ANSI B31.1.
• Polyethylene Pipe: ASTM D2513, SDR 11.5. • Fittings: ASTM D2683 or ASTM D2513 socket type. • Joints: Fusion welded.
NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
• Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 Schedule 40 black. • Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M. • Joints: ASME B31.1. • Jacket: AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape.
NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
• Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 Schedule 40 black. • Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M. • Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ANSI B31.1.
FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
• Pipe Size 3 inches and Under: • Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. • Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.
203-294 3603 11-03
• Pipe Size over 1 inch: • Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. • Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets.
• Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: • Housing: Malleable iron clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe. • Sealing gasket: "C" shape composition sealing gasket.
• Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.
GLOBE VALVES
• Up To and Including 3 inches : • Manufacturers: • Grinnell or equal. • MSS SP-80, Class 125 bronze body, bronze trim, handwheel, teflon disc, threaded ends.
BALL VALVES
• Manufacturer: Grinell or equal.
• Construction, 2 inches and Smaller: Model 3810, three-piece body.
RELIEF VALVES
• Pressure Relief: • AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated.
• Temperature and Pressure Relief: • AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F , capacity ASME SEC IV certified and labeled.
SOLENOID VALVES
• Remotely Controlled: • Butler and Land 8210 Series. Coordinate voltage with Control Contractor. • Brass body, Type 3 general purpose enclosure.
204-294 3603 11-03
FIRE STOP SYSTEMS
• General Purpose Fire Stopping Sealant: • Water based, nonslumping, premixed sealant with intumescent properties, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E814 and UL 1479.
• General Purpose Vibration Resistant Fire Stopping Sealant: • Silicone based, nonslumping, premixed sealant with intumescent properties, vibration and moisture resistant, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E814 and UL 1479.
• DWV Plastic Pipe Systems Fire Stopping Sealant: • Silicone based, premixed sealant with intumescent properties, vibration and moisture resistant, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E814 and UL 1479 with metal collars.
PART 3 EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
• Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
PREPARATION
• Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
• Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
• Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
INSTALLATION
• Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
• Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
• Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.
• Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space.
• Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
205-294 3603 11-03
• Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
• Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 15260.
• Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 2 ft of cover.
• Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.
• Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
• Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.
• Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting.
• Excavate in accordance with Section 15100 for work of this Section.
• Backfill in accordance with Section 15100 work of this Section.
• Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
• Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
• Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof hood.
• Install water piping to ASME B31.9.
APPLICATION
• Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.
• Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
• Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe.
• Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
206-294 3603 11-03
• Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
• Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/4 inch per foot maximum and 1/8 inch per foot minimum. Maintain gradients.
• Slope water piping minimum 0.25 percent and arrange to drain at low points.
DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
• Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
• Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).
• Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual.
• Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets.
• Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
• If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
• Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.
• Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 5 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
SERVICE CONNECTIONS
• Provide new sanitary sewer service or tie into existing sewer service as shown on drawings. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.
• Provide new water service complete with approved reduced pressure or double check backflow preventer and water meter with by-pass valves and pressure reducing valve or tie into existing water service valve as shown on drawings.
• Provide new gas service or tie to existing gas line as shown on drawings. Gas service distribution piping to have initial minimum pressure of 5 pounds. Provide regulators on each building service line as shown on Drawings, sized in
207-294 3603 11-03
accordance with equipment. Regulator to be Rockwell 143 or equal for demands up to 800 CFH and Rockwell 243 or equal for demands up to 2500 CFH.
208-294 3603 11-03
15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
• Floor drains.
• Cleanouts.
• Hose bibs.
• Backflow preventers.
• Water hammer arrestors.
• Pressure reducing valves.
RELATED SECTIONS
• Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping.
• Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures.
REFERENCES
• ASME A112.21.1 - Floor Drains.
• ASME A112.26.1 - Water Hammer Arrestors.
• ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.
• ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventers with Immediate Atmospheric Vent.
• ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle.
• ASSE 1019 - Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-Backflow Types.
• AWWA C506 - Backflow Prevention Devices - Reduced Pressure Principle and Double Check Valve Types.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
209-294 3603 11-03
• Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
• Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
EXTRA MATERIALS
• Supply two hose end vacuum breakers for hose bibs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
FLOOR DRAINS
• Floor Drain: • Manufacturers: • Josam 30003-5A • Substitutions: Permitted. • ANSI A112.21.1; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, 1/2” trap primer and round, adjustable Nikaloy strainer.
CLEANOUTS
• Exterior Unsurfaced Areas: • Manufacturers: • Josam 58180-22. • Substitutions: Permitted. • Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round bronze cover.
• Interior Finished Wall Areas: • Manufacturers: • Josam 58600 • Substitutions: Permitted. • Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.
HOSE BIBS
• Exterior: • Manufacturers: • Woodford Model B-65. • Substitutions: Permitted.
210-294 3603 11-03
• Bronze or brass, one piece valve plunger to control both flow and drain functions, hose thread spout, loose key, vacuum breaker in conformance with ANSI/ASSE 1011, chrome finished box.
BACKFLOW PREVENTER
• Double Check Valve Assemblies: • Manufacturers: • Watts Series 009QT for lines 1/2” to 3”. • Watts Series 909 for lines 4” to 8”. • Substitutions: Permitted. • ANSI/ASSE 1015, AWWA C510; Bronze or epoxy coated ductile iron body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent; valve shut offs.
WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
• Manufacturer: Watts Series 15.
• Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. • Josam 75000-S Series. • Substitutions: Permitted.
• ANSI A112.26.1; copper or stainless steel construction, bellows or piston type sized in accordance with PDI WH-201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range -33 to 180 degrees F and maximum 150 psi working pressure.
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
• Manufacturer: Watts Series 223B or U5B. • Substitutions: Permitted.
• Construction: Bronze body, stainless steel strainer, threaded inlet and tailpiece, removable disc holder, sealed cage, high capacity.
• Provide pressure reducing valve as required by local codes. Set pressure at 80 psi or as required to comply with local codes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
• Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
211-294 3603 11-03
• Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.
• Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. See Drawings for detail.
• Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur; on main water supply, boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler system, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibs.
• Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain.
• Install water hammer arrestors on hot and cold water supply piping to each and every fixture.
212-294 3603 11-03
15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
• Water closets.
• Urinals.
• Lavatories.
• Electric water fountain.
• Electric water heater.
• Recirculating pump.
RELATED SECTIONS
• Section 15140 – Hangers and Supports.
• Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping.
• Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties.
REFERENCES
• ARI 1010 - Drinking Fountains and Self-Contained Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking Water Coolers.
• ASME A112.6.1 - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use.
• ASME A112.18.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
• ASME A112.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures.
• ASME A112.19.5 - Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks, and Urinals.
• NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
• Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes.
213-294 3603 11-03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
• Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
• Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
• Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
• Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use.
EXTRA MATERIALS
• Supply two sets of faucet washers, flush valve service kits and lavatory supply fittings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
• Refer to drawings for complete plumbing fixture schedule.
SUBSTITUTIONS
• Substitutions permitted with Engineer’s approval.
PART 3 EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
• Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.
• Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
• Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top lavatories and sinks.
PREPARATION
214-294 3603 11-03
• Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures.
INSTALLATION
• Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
• Provide chrome plated flexible supplies to fixtures with stops, reducers, and escutcheons.
• Install components level and plumb.
• Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts.
• Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant, color to match fixture.
• Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended to hold fixture in place.
ADJUSTING
• Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.
CLEANING
• Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
• Do not permit use of fixtures.
SCHEDULES
• Fixture Heights: Install fixtures to heights above finished floor as indicated.
• Water Closet: • Standard: 15 inches to top of bowl rim. • Accessible: 17 1/2 inches to top of seat. • Children’s Accessible: 15 inches to top of seat. • Urinal: • Standard: 24 inches to top of bowl rim. • Accessible: 17 inches to top of bowl rim. • Children’s Accessible: 14 inches to of bowl rim. • Lavatory:
215-294 3603 11-03
• Standard: 31 inches to top of basin rim. • Accessible: 34 inches to top of basin rim. • Children’s Accessible: 30 inches to top of basin rim. • Drinking Fountain: • Standard Adult: 40 inches to top of basin rim. • Accessible: 36 inches to top of spout. • Children’s Accessible: 32 inches to top of spout.
• Fixture Rough-In
Hot Cold Waste Vent
Water Closet: 1 inch 4 inch 3 inch
Urinal: 3/4 inch 2 inch 1-1/2 in
Lavatory: 1/2 inch 1/2 inch 2 inch 1-1/2 in
Drinking 1/2 inch 2 inch 1-1/2 in
216-294 3603 11-03
15800 - HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
• The General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 documents apply to work of this section.
SUMMARY
• It is intended that the air conditioning work indicated in the Specifications and/or on the drawings shall make up into working systems complete in every detail unless indicated otherwise.
• All materials and labor, whether specifically indicated or not, but incidental to the proper installation of the air conditioning work, shall be furnished complete in every detail unless indicated otherwise.
• Refer to the Architectural, structural, and mechanical drawings for construction details, and coordinate work with that of other trades so as to avoid unnecessary delays or damage to any part of installation.
• This section includes the necessary labor, materials, equipment, etc., to complete the air conditioning work that is indicated in or required by the contract documents.
• Generally the air conditioning work includes, but is not limited to, the following: • Air Duct Work • Acoustical Duct Liner • External Insulation • Registers • Grilles • Diffusers • Air Devices • Refrigerant Piping and Fittings • Valves and Accessories • Refrigerant Pipe Insulation • Condensate Drain Piping and Fittings • Condensate Drain Pipe Insulation • Air Handling Units • Auxiliary Drain Pans • Condensing Units • Roof Curbs • Foundations • Sleeves 217-294 3603 11-03
• Escutcheons • Flashings • Hangers • Aluminum Louvers • Fire Dampers • Exhaust Fans • Rooftop Heating/Cooling Units • Controls
• CODES
• Comply with International Mechanical Code, 2000 Edition. • Code requirements shall have precedence over drawings and specifications. Perform modifications to meet code requirements at no additional cost. Notify Architect of such modifications.
• PERMITS
• Obtain and pay for all permits and similar required charges incurred on account of the work.
• DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
• Should any discrepancies exist between the Air Conditioning Specifications and the Air Conditioning Drawings, the Air Conditioning Specifications shall govern. • The drawings are diagrammatic, but shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the project will permit. Changes from these drawings necessary to fit the work of various trades, to conform to equipment actually being installed, or the rules of authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at no additional cost. • Verify the exact locations and route of the various items with respect to the Architectural details and work of other trades. The Architect reserves the right to make reasonable changes in location of any equipment, controls or air outlets before installation without additional cost. • Shop drawings for the air conditioning work shall be furnished by the Contractor if required by the Architect or other trades.
• SUBMITTALS
• Submit complete descriptive data, including manufacturer, catalog number, and complete physical and other characteristics for the following items: • Insulation - Pipe and Ductwork • Registers, Grilles, Diffusers, and Air Devices • Air Handling Units
218-294 3603 11-03
• Condensing Units • Roof Curbs • Aluminum Louvers • Fire Dampers • Exhaust Fans • Rooftop Heating/Cooling Units • Controls • Individual descriptive data sheets and items shall be identified clearly by corresponding letters, numbers, etc. to match corresponding identifications on air conditioning plans before submittals will be approved. • Submittals shall be prepared in accordance with requirements of Division I. • Partial submittals are not acceptable and will be returned without review. • Submit data to Architect for approval before ordering equipment. • If original submission is not approved, revise the brochures and resubmit until a submission is approved.
• VERIFICATION
• Verification of any job site conditions affecting the air conditioning work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor performing the work of this section unless indicated otherwise.
• WORKMANSHIP
• Labor shall be performed by mechanics skilled in their particular trades. • Workmanship not in accordance with standard approved practices for installing the air conditioning work shall be made to comply with these practices. • The Contractor and his employees shall perform their work in a safe manner and maintain adequate protection for their work, the owners property and all persons on the site to avoid injury, damage, or loss.
PART 2 MATERIALS
AGE
• Materials for the air conditioning work must be new unless indicated otherwise.
STANDARDS
• All items of material and equipment for standards have been established shall be so listed and shall bear listing labels.
STORAGE AND HANDLING
219-294 3603 11-03
• Store materials in a suitable location at the project site in manufacturer's original containers with labels intact.
• Protect stored material and finished work from damage.
• Damaged material or equipment shall be rejected and shall be replaced with undamaged items.
• Close all openings with caps or plugs during construction.
ELECTRICAL WORK
• Furnish and install all motors, thermostats, electric valves, and similar items.
• Power wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 and will be provided under the appropriated sections.
• Control wiring and wiring devices shall be provided under this Section.
MOTORS AND MOTOR STARTERS
• Motors • General: Provide all motors generally in accordance with following except as otherwise specified under various equipment headings. Provide totally enclosed fan-cooled motors when exposed to weather. • Three-phase Motors: Where designated on drawings, motors shall be standard, drip-proof, squirrel cage induction type, NEMA Design B, with Class B insulation, 1750 rpm 60 cycle, rated at the voltage and HP indicated on the drawings for continuous duty with 1.15 service factor at 40 degrees C ambient temperature. Motors 75 hp and larger shall be increment starting type. Provide grease-lubricated anti-friction bearings, conservatively rated for long life at maximum load conditions, including radial and thrust loading imposed by drive. Provide alemite fittings. • Single-phase Motors: Motors shall be standard, drip-proof, 1750 rpm, 115/1/60 or 208/1/60 motors rated at indicated hp for continuous duty with 1.15 service factor at 40 degrees C ambient temperature. Motors 1/6 hp and larger shall be of capacitor start type; smaller motors of split-phase type and equipped with automatic thermal protectors. Provide grease- packed, sealed, anti-friction bearings, conservatively rated for long life at maximum load conditions, including loading imposed by drives. • Motor Noise: Replace motor which, in opinion of Architect, is found to have unreasonable noise characteristics, either at time of original installation or during guarantee period, with new "extra quiet" motor, at no additional cost to Owner.
220-294 3603 11-03
• Motor Starters: Except where otherwise noted, provide integral with the equipment or as specified under various equipment headings. Motor starters are included as part of work covered in DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL.
PART 3 EXECUTION
PROGRESS
• The air conditioning work shall progress with the other work so that no delays in construction are incurred.
SCHEDULING
• Schedule work and provide notice to permit inspection by the Architect and for Authorities having jurisdiction before the work is concealed. Installations shall be consistent in completeness and appearance whether enclosed or exposed. Any items which do not present a neat or workmanlike appearance shall be replaced at no additional cost.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
• Perform all cutting, patching and sleeving required for the work. No cuts shall be made that will weaken the structure.
• Perform all cutting and patching in accordance with the General Conditions and with Architect's approval.
• Coordinate the work of other trades so that air conditioning work is installed when space is accessible. Cutting and patching caused by failure to coordinate work shall be performed at no additional cost.
• At all points where piping penetrates the roof, this Contractor shall flash and counterflash in an approved manner to obtain water tight construction at the penetration. Roof penetration shall be supervision of the roofing Contractor.
• All sleeves, floor penetration, etc. shall be sealed solid with approved material immediately upon the filling of that opening with pipe or duct.
LAYOUT OF WORK
• Verify the exact location of equipment, controls and air outlets and route duct and piping with respect to Architectural details and work of other trades.
• Adjust piping and ductwork locations to clear light fixtures, piping and other obstructions.
221-294 3603 11-03
• Drawings are diagrammatic and minor deviations to fit shall be anticipated.
• Conceal piping and ductwork in the building structure (except in equipment rooms) unless indicated otherwise and run neatly with building lines when exposed.
CHANGES
• Changes in price for the air conditioning work can only be made for changes in the original design intentions and only after written consent of the Architect.
CLEANING AND PAINTING
• Dispose of unused material, equipment, waste and rubbish.
• Remove all labels, dirt, paint, grease and stains from all exposed equipment installed under this contract to present a first class job suitable for occupancy.
• Clean and touch-up paint all equipment provided under this section that has paint damage. Touch-up paint colors shall match perfectly.
CERTIFICATE OF ACCEPTANCE
• Provide written certificates of acceptance from Authorities having jurisdiction before final inspection of the project.
INSPECTION
• Upon completion of the contract, there will be a substantial completion inspection of the complete installation. Prior to this inspection, all work under this section shall have been completed, and put in perfect operating condition.
GUARANTEES AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
• Before project's final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Architect three bound sets of descriptive, dimensional and parts data for the following: • Registers, Grilles, Diffusers and Air Devices • Air Handling Units • Condensing Units • Exhaust Fans • Controls • Rooftop Heating/Cooling Units
• Each set of this literature shall be bound in a permanent type hard cover ring binder and shall be suitably indexed.
222-294 3603 11-03
• Equipment manuals shall also include warranties, guarantees, and manufacturer's instruction shipped with equipment.
• Furnish all special servicing tools and keys to any locked equipment. These materials shall be furnished to the Owner through the Architect prior to final inspection.
• Furnish operating and maintenance data as specified herein for each product or system and include: • Name, address and telephone number of Subcontractor. • Description of unit and component parts. • Function, normal operating conditions. • Performance curves, engineering data and tests. • Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts. • Operating Procedures • Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions. • Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions. • Summer and winter operating instructions. • Special operating instructions. • Maintenance Procedures: • Routine operations. • Guide to "trouble-shooting". • Parts Lists (Including Source). • Servicing and lubricating schedule: List of lubricant required. • Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. • Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. • As installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. • Instruction of Owner's Personnel: • Prior to final inspection fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment, and maintenance of all products, equipment and systems. • Maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction. • Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance.
GENERAL GUARANTEES
• The Owner shall be guaranteed by the Contractor that any defects arising in the work within one year of the date of acceptance shall be corrected free of charge.
223-294 3603 11-03
15840 - DUCTWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
• Supply and Return Ducts.
• Exhaust Ducts.
DEFINITIONS
• Duct sizes: Inside clear dimensions for ducts.
• For acoustically lined or internally insulated ducts, increase duct dimensions as required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
• Ducts: Galvanized steel lock forming quality, having zinc coating of 1.25 ounces per square foot for each side.
• Fasteners: Use rivets and bolts throughout; sheet metal screws accepted on low pressure ducts.
• Sealant: Water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials.
LOW PRESSURE SHEETMETAL DUCT
• Rectangular Ducts:
Largest Duct Dimensions Gauges of Metal Up to 18” No. 26 US Gauge 19” thru 36” No. 24 US Gauge 37” thru 60” No. 22 US Gauge 61” thru 96” No, 20 US Gauge 96” and Up No. 18 US Gauge
• Round Ducts:
• Round ducts shall be 26 gage minimum. All transverse joints shall be secured with a minimum of 3 sheet metal screws. • Exposed round ducts shall be 22 gage minimum.
224-294 3603 11-03
• Boots to air outlets, returns or exhausts may be Thermaflex M-KF, or approved equal flexible duct.
• Lengths shall be 48” maximum. • Seal duct at inlet and outlet connections with duct sealant. • Secure coated steel wire helix to sheet metal with sheet metal band or neoprene ties. • Seal insulation ends with foil tape - not duct tape.
• Provide and install splitter dampers or butterfly dampers as indicated. These dampers shall have blades of 16 gauge steel fastened to square operating rods.
• Butterfly dampers shall be the full width of the duct in which they are installed.
• The operating rods shall be fittings with Young Regulators and the operating head shall be securely fastened in place so as to be exposed and accessible in the finished building. • Young regulators shall be recessed type with cover plate flush with finish where installed in finished areas. • In areas with lay-in ceiling, controllers shall be rod type with ball joint bracket and shall be accessible above ceiling. • Operators on round ducts shall be 637 Ventlok with insulation under regulator and adjacent insulation thoroughly sealed with foil tape.
• To facilitate the final balancing of the air handling system, control devices shall be installed to control the quantity of air delivered by each individual outlet.
• The following bracing, or SMACNA equal bracing, shall apply:
Largest Duct Type of Transverse Intermediate Dimension Joint Connection Bracing
Up thru 18” S slip or drive slip on 8’-0 None maximum centers.
19” thru 36” 1” pocket lock or standing S None on 4’-0 maximum centers.
19” thru 36” 1” pocket lock or standing S 1”x1”x1/8” on 8’-0” maximum centers. angle 48” max.spacing
37” thru 48” 1-1/2” pocket lock or 1-5/8” None standing S on 4’-0” maximum centers.
225-294 3603 11-03
49”thru 54” 1-1/2” pocket lock, 22 ga. 1-1/2”x 1-1/2” x 8’-0” maximum center. 1/8” angle 36” max. spacing
55” thru 72” 1-1/2” pocket lock, 20 ga. 1-1/2”x1-1/2” on 8’-0”, max. centers x 1/4” angle reinforced with 1-1/2” x 1-1/2” 36” max. spacing 3/16” bar.
73” thru 96” 2” standing S, 20 ga., None reinforced with 2”x2”x3/16” angle on 30” maximum centers.
• When ductwork is to remain exposed use 1/2” all-thread from structure and Unistrut P1000T suppport. Spacing shall be per Section 15090 Hangers & Supports.
• Where indicated, ductwork shall be lined with 1-1/2” density Johns-Manville, Lina-Coustic, or Fiberglass duct liner.
• Unless otherwise indicated, insulate all low velocity supply, return, exhaust and fresh air ducts constructed from galvanized steel. Insulation brand may be Manville, Owens Corning, or equal.
FLEXIBLE DUCT
• Flexible duct shall be a factory fabricated assembly consisting of an inner sleeve, insulation and an outer moisture barrier. The inner sleeve shall be constructed of a continuous vinyl-coated spring steel wire helix fused to a continuous layer of fiber glass impregnated and coated with vinyl. A 1-1/4 inch thick insulating blanket of fiber glass wool shall encase the inner sleeve and be sheathed with an outer moisture barrier of a reinforced Molar or neoprene laminate of low permeability. The flexible duct shall be rated for a maximum working velocity of 6000 FPM and shall be listed by the Underwriters’ Laboratories under their UL- 181 standards as a Class 1 duct and shall comply with NFPA Standard #90A. The flexible duct shall be Thermaflex M-KE for low pressure application.
• Flex duct shall not exceed 5’-0” in length or have more than 90 degree of bend. If longer duct is required, use round sheet metal duct with 1-1/2” thick duct insulation to make-up the difference in length.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
FABRICATION
• Complete metal ducts within themselves with no single partition between ducts. Open corners are not acceptable.
226-294 3603 11-03
• Lap metal ducts in direction of air flow. Hammer down edges and slips to leave smooth duct interior.
• Construct tees, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on center line. • Where not possible and where rectangular elbows used, provide double wall air foil type turning vanes.
• Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence however possible. Maximum divergence upstream of equipment to be 30 degrees and 45 degrees convergence downstream.
• Rigidly construct metal ducts, with joints mechanically tight, substantially airtight, braced and stiffened so as not to breathe, rattle, vibrate, or sag. Seal all joints.
• Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts with piping and structure. Where easements exceed 10% duct area, split into two ducts maintaining original duct area.
• Ducts shall be so constructed and installed as to be completely free from vibration under all conditions of operation.
• Round ducts, ells, and fittings shall have each transverse joint secured with a minimum of 3 sheet metal screws. • Each joint of round ducts and fittings shall be sealed with a double layer of 2” wide duct tape.
• Items not shown in detail or covered by detailed specifications shall be as set forth in the SMACNA publication, Low Velocity Duct Construction Standards.
INSTALLLATION
• Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities.
• At each point where ducts pass through partitions, seal joints around duct with sheet metal flanges all around duct, secured to wall, on both sides of wall.
• Install supply and return grilles indicated and as required.
• All duct joints shall be reasonably airtight.
227-294 3603 11-03
• Seal all transverse slip joints of all ducts. Sealant shall be heavy brush coat of Foster 30-02 or Hardcast 601. Exposed duct shall be sealed internal to joint. Do not insulate exposed duct.
228-294 3603 11-03
15850 - HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
SCOPE
• Unless specifically designated otherwise herein, this Contractor shall furnish and/ or install each and every item of equipment described in this section and/or shown on the plans, together with all components and incidentals, materials, labor, fees, transportation, tools, storage, cutting, patching, cleanup, etc. necessary to complete the work.
• Principal work is as follows • Gas heat furnaces with DX coils and outdoor condensing units as noted and as scheduled. • Complete supply, return and exhaust ductwork systems with grilles, registers, diffusers and balancing dampers. • Thermal and Acoustical Insulation. • Complete Control Systems. • Equipment Start-Up, Testing, and Balancing.
ELECTRICAL
• The Mechanical Contractor shall: • Furnish all control equipment, including motor starters, all control wiring, and all control wire installation. • Supervise and check out all wiring for correct operation of connected equipment.
• Electrical Contractor will: • Furnish all electrical power wiring external to equipment. • Furnish and install all conduit and boxes.
• Electrical characteristics shall be as noted on plans.
PLUMBING
• Condensate drains from units to receptor shall be installed by this Air Conditioning Contractor. Condensate drain piping shall be Schedule 40 PVC.
• Condensate drains shall be installed and run for complete and correctly operating systems. • Run from unit to French drain. French drain shall be a minimum 24” in diameter and 24” deep. Stub condensate drain a minimum of 6” below grade and secure. • Install plugged cleanouts at each change in direction to allow cleaning.
229-294 3603 11-03
• Provide insulation.
• Supervise and check out all piping for correct operation of connected equipment.
Coordination
• The Contractor shall examine the site and shall verify to his own satisfaction the location of all existing facilities and shall adequately inform himself as to their relations and effect on the work before submitting his bid.
• The Contractor shall do all cutting required, and shall be responsible for all patching. Coordinate all work with other trades before cutting any portion of building or area which will affect other trades.
SCHEDULING OF CONSTRUCTION
• Schedule construction operations so as to keep Owner in complete operation in all areas and at all times, except as specifically approved by Owner.
• Schedule connections into existing services for minimum of inconvenience to the Owner. All such connections that will disrupt services shall be specifically approved by the Owner prior to disconnecting any service.
PART 2 - EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
• Equipment • General: Unitary outdoor condensing units as indicated on drawings shall be installed to provide performance and capacities shown on the drawings. Each system consists of an electrically controlled compressor for cooling duty. Equipment shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be assembled and tested at the factory. The condensing unit and the air handler shall be matched and be certified to produce capacities and other performance requirements in conformance with ARI Standard 240 and 270. Their capacities shall be as indicated on the drawings. Efficiency will be minimum 12.0 SEER. • Air Handling Units: Shall meet the performance scheduled on plans without moisture carry-over and for static pressure loss encountered. Provide a condensate drain from the evaporator as indicated on drawings. Each evaporator shall be complete with insulated drain pan, expansion valve, insulated casing, fan, drive motor, belt drive high limit control, and filter section with throw away filters. Adjustable drive sheave shall be installed to provide the air quantity scheduled. • Condensing Units: All Power and control wiring shall be factory installed and terminated on a terminal strip. Hermetic compressor and condenser
230-294 3603 11-03
fan motor starters with thermal overload protection shall be included in the unit. Safety devices shall include high and low pressurestats. Provide low ambient head pressure control for 40 FBD or lower. All controls, starters, and wiring shall be in a compartment removed from condenser fan and coil. All units shall be factory painted with enamel that is standard with the manufacturer with housing suitable for outdoor installation. Condenser coils shall have copper tubes with aluminum fins, factory pressure and leak tested. Furnish coil guards for units with vertical condenser coils. The compressor shall have a 10-year warranty. • Foundations: Provide concrete foundations for outdoor units as shown on the plans. Foundations and supports must be constructed in such a manner as to hold equipment a clear 6 inches above finish grade to avoid flooding. • Heating Section: Shall be natural gas, UL approved and meet capacities and performances shown on the drawings.
• Units shall be as scheduled by Carrier, Trane or Lennox. Obtain Engineer’s approval for other manufacturers.
• Smoke detectors shall be Fenwall DH-400 AC/DC approved equal, furnished, installed, and wired completely. • Interlock A/C Unit Fan Controls thru smoke detector auxiliary contact. • Provide power to smoke detector from A/C control power. Provide transformer as required. • Detectors shall be complete, with duct housing sample tubes, and remote indicator lamps. • Mount detectors in supply air stream, all per Manufacturer’s Recommendations and Fire Marshal’s Requirements. • Mount firestat in return air stream prior to mixing with fresh air makeup.
FIRE DAMPERS
• Fire dampers shall be installed in supply, recirculation and exhaust ducts wherever such ducts pass through fire walls, and as required by National Fire Protection Association recommendations and applicable local codes. Fire dampers shall be constructed and tested in accordance with Underwriters Laboratory Standard UL-555. Fire dampers shall be operated by UL listed fusible link, 165 degrees F. Access panels shall be provided in duct enclosures or in general construction as required to permit access to duct for resetting the damper. Dampers are to have spring closure. Dampers shall have equivalent to Air Balance, Inc., "Fireseal". Equivalent dampers as made by Advanced Air, Ruskin Mfg. Co., Prefco, etc., may be used. Fire dampers shall be installed as per SMACNA manual. Damper shall be 100% free duct opening area type with steel sleeve and retaining angles.
CONTROL SYSTEM
231-294 3603 11-03
• The HVAC Temperature Control Systems shall be furnished complete in all respects under this Section of the specifications. All unit controls and controls furnished as an integral part of the unit shall be furnished under this Section of the specification.
• All control wiring shall be color coded.
• Control Wiring shall be installed in conduit where required for physical protection of wiring.
• Sufficient relays and other protective devices shall be employed as required to eliminate feed-back in all control circuits.
• All low voltage wiring shall be provided by under Division 15 of the Specifications.
• Only line voltage interlock wiring or other line voltage wiring specifically specified in Division 16 or shown on the Electrical Drawings shall be provided by the Electrical Trades. Coordinate with electrical trades for portions of conduit systems provided under Division 16 of the specifications.
• The control systems shall be equivalent to the type indicated on the drawings, and the Contractor shall provide and install all components and wiring required to effect a complete and operating system.
EXHAUST FANS
• Provide exhaust fans as scheduled and as noted.
• Equal fans by Cook, Acme, Greenheck or Penn are approved.
GRILLES AND REGISTERS
• Registers, grilles, and diffusers shall be surface mounted steel type, as manufactured by Titus or equal. Ceiling devices shall be off-white to match ceiling. Wall grilles and registers shall be off-white, or painted as directed by the Architect, except where noted otherwise on the drawings. Where fire rated air devices are required they shall be steel and UL listed for their intended use.
• Equipment and materials shall be as specified on the drawings.
• All diffusers and registers shall have opposed blade dampers where access to volume dampers is difficult after building is finished.
• All grilles, registers and ceiling outlets shall be selected to provide a noise criteria no greater than 25. Grilles, registers, and outlet sizes shown on the drawings are
232-294 3603 11-03
minimum sizes; and where larger sizes are required to comply with the above noise criteria, larger grilles, registers and ceiling outlets shall be furnished and installed at no additional cost to the Owner. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to arrange for any additional space required for such larger grilles, registers and ceiling outlets.
• Paint all surfaces above (or behind) perforated return air grilles or other open spaced air outlet devices with flat black paint. All piping, conduits, ductwork, structural members shall be painted. Make sure that no nonpainted surfaces are visible to a person standing on the room side and viewing through the device.
• Diffusers and grilles designated for maximum security type shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum or stainless steel designed specifically for installation in such environment. All exposed mounting hardware shall be tamperproof. Provide clamping ring for ceiling mounted devices.
• Other equal Manufacturers: Airmate, J and J, Metal Aire, Carnes, and other equals.
FAN CONNECTIONS
• At all points where ducts connect to fans, provide and install flexible connections. These connections are to be long enough to permit a minimum separation of 3” between duct and fan or unit housing with at least 1” slack in the flexible material itself.
• These flexible connections shall be made using Ventfab canvas that has been chemically treated to make it fire resistant, waterproof, mildew-resistant, and practically air-tight, and shall weigh approximately 30 oz. per sq. yd. before treating.
FRESH AIR INTAKE AND EXHAUST OUTLET
• Fresh air intake and exhaust outlet shall be fabricated as noted.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSPECTION
• Examine all areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
HVAC SYSTEM LAYOUT
233-294 3603 11-03
• Lay out the HVAC system in careful coordination with the drawings. Follow the general layout shown on the drawings in all cases except where other work may interfere. Lay out all pipes to fall within partition, walls or roof cavities, and do not require furring other than as shown on the drawings. Coordinate locations of registers, grilles, and diffusers with ceiling layout and other building components.
INSTALLATION GENERAL
• Install all HVAC components to clear all beams and obstructions.
• Provide sleeves for all piping and ducts passing through concrete masonry walls, roofs, and floors. Sleeves shall be of sufficient size to clear by 1/4" all around. Sleeves shall be cut off flush with wall face or below floors and shall extend 6" above the floor or roof. Sleeves around pipe passing through ground floor or outside walls shall be caulked water tight with oakum and plastic cement. Chrome plated brass escutcheons shall be provided wherever pipes pass through floors, walls, and ceilings of finished areas.
AIR DUCT WORK
• Air ducts shall be installed as indicated on the drawings and coordinated with the work of the other trades. Check all drawings for exact locations to prevent interferences.
• Splitter dampers shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the drawings and as required at each branch for air distribution control to the respective branches. Provide chrome plated concealed damper regulators for ducts exposed to view. A sheet metal wear plate shall be attached to the top and bottom of the duct to prevent damper tearing duct liner. Provide end bearings on all dampers.
• Flashing and counter flashing shall be furnished and installed at all ducts passing through roof and exterior walls to the satisfaction of the Architect.
• Flexible air duct connections shall be furnished and installed as indicated on the drawings. Flexible air duct runs to diffusers shall not exceed 5 feet.
• Seal visible openings and audible air leaks at operating conditions. Leakage shall be in accordance with section 4 of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Additional care shall be taken with ducts involved in smoke purge systems. Such duct shall be sealed in accordance with SMACNA medium pressure duct system requirements.
PIPING SUPPORTS
• Provide all pipe supports required. Horizontal runs of pipe in the building shall be rigidly supported to building structures with adjustable swivel couplings and rod type hangers for sizes #4 and smaller. Perforated strap hangers will not be 234-294 3603 11-03
permitted in any part of the work. Pipe hangers and supports shall be located near change of directions and at points required to properly support piping. Spacing or hangers and supports shall not exceed the following maximum distances between supports:
Pipe Size Span
1/2” and smaller 5'-0"
1 1/8" 7'-0"
All Plastic piping 4'-0"
• Provide sheet metal "saddles" at each pipe hanger or support for insulated piping to prevent damage to insulation.
EQUIPMENT AND OUTLET LOCATION
• Locations for equipment and outlets for the HVAC work shall be determined by the Architect. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
EXHAUST FANS
• Install exhaust fans and related accessories as indicated on the drawings.
CONTROL DAMPERS
• Assemble multiple section dampers with required interconnecting linkage and extend required number of shafts through duct for external mounting of damper motors.
PIPING AND ACCESSORIES
• Installation: Joints in copper tubing shall be brazed with silver solder as hereinbefore specified. Surplus brazing material shall be removed at all joints in lines not insulated.
• Surface Preparation: Prior to insulation installation, clean and dry exterior surfaces of pipe, fittings and valves.
REFRIGERANT
• When installation is completed, the Contractor shall thoroughly test for leaks, make the system tight, apply a deep vacuum, and fully charge them with refrigerant. Upon completion of the operating tests, he shall replace any oil or refrigerant lost during the test operations. Upon acceptance Contractor shall leave the systems fully charged.
235-294 3603 11-03
15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
• Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.
• Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
ALLOWANCES
• Allowance includes testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical systems. Work is included in this section and is part of the Contract Sum/Price.
REFERENCES
• AABC - National Standards for Total System Balance.
• ADC - Test Code for Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers.
• ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.
• NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems.
• SMACNA - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
SUBMITTALS
• Test Reports: Indicate data on forms containing information indicated in Schedules and Drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used
PART 3 EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
• Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions: • Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. • Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
236-294 3603 11-03
• Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. • Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. • Duct systems are clean of debris. • Fans are rotating correctly. • Volume dampers are in place and open. • Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. • Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. • Air outlets are installed and connected. • Duct system leakage is minimized. • Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place. • Service and balance valves are open.
• Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services which prevent system balance.
• Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
PREPARATION
• Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations.
• Provide additional balancing devices as required.
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
• Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.
• Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
ADJUSTING
• An Independent Engineer shall perform tests described herein, said tests being made in the presence of Architect or his representative and to his complete satisfaction.
• Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
• Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.
237-294 3603 11-03
• After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified.
• Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
• Piping and ductwork shall be checked and the approved by the Architect before being concealed. The Architect shall be notified at least 24 hours prior to inspection time. No piping or ductwork shall be covered or concealed until approval has been obtained.
• After work is completed, entire job shall be tested under actual working pressures and conditions and valves and automatic attachments are to be properly set before job is turned over to Owner.
AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
• Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities.
• Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.
• Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
• Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise.
• Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters.
• Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.
• Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.
• Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.
• Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage.
238-294 3603 11-03
SYSTEM TESTING AND BALANCING
• Testing and balancing shall be performed in complete accordance with AABC and/or N.E.B.B. Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Form No. 81266, Volume One. Testing and balancing shall be performed by the mechanical Contractor.
• Instruments used for testing and balancing of systems must have been calibrated within a period of six months and been checked for accuracy prior to start of work.
• Five copies of the complete test report shall be submitted prior to final acceptance of the project.
• The Air Balance and Testing shall be performed in accordance with the following requirements. • Test and adjust blower rpm to design requirements. • Test and record all motor full load amperes and nameplate data. • Make pilot tube traverse of main supply and obtain design cfm at fans. • Test and record system static pressures, suction and discharge. • Test and adjust system for design cfm recirculated air. • Test and adjust system for design cfm outside air. • Test and record entering air temperatures (db heating and cooling). • Test and record entering air temperatures (wb cooling). • Test and record leaving air temperatures (db heating and cooling). • Test and record leaving air temperatures (wb cooling). • Adjust all main supply and return air flows, and all fans to proper design cfm. • Test and adjust each diffuser, grille and register to within 5% of design requirements. • Identify each diffuser, grille and register as to location and area. • Identify and list size, type, and manufacture of diffusers, grilles, registers, and all testing equipment. Use manufacturer’s rating all equipment to make required calculations. • In readings and test of diffusers, grilles, and registers, include required fpm velocity and test fpm velocity, and required cfm and test cfm after adjustments. • Verify location and operation of all fusible link and smoke dampers, and record results. • All air conditioning units shall be tested in both heating and cooling modes.
• As part of this contract the Mechanical Contractor shall make any changes in the pulleys, belts and dampers, as required for correct balance at no additional cost to the Owner.
239-294 3603 11-03
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
• The Architectural and Structural Plans and Specifications, including the supplements issued thereto, Information to Bidders, and other pertinent documents issued by the Owner, are a part of these specifications and the accompanying mechanical and electrical plans, and shall be complied with in every respect. All the above is included herewith, will be issued separately or is on file at the Owner’s office, and shall be examined by all bidders. Failure to comply shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility or be used as a basis for additional compensation due to omission of drawings. Where the Supplementary General Conditions conflict with the General Conditions, the Supplementary General Conditions shall govern.
• All work covered by this division of the specifications shall be accomplished in accordance with all applicable provisions of the contract documents and any addenda or directive which may be issued.
• The electrical Contractor shall familiarize himself with the General Provisions for Mechanical, Section 15000, and comply with those requirements which affect his work.
GENERAL
• The Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment, materials, etc. and shall perform all operations in connection with the installation of electrical work in accordance with these contract documents.
• The Contractor shall execute all work specified or indicated on accompanying drawings. Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary and usually furnished in connection with such work and systems, whether or not specifically mentioned.
• Every Contractor shall be responsible for all his work fitting into place in a satisfactory and neat workmanlike manner in every particular to the approval of the owner.
• Confer with the general Contractor and other Contractors regarding the location and size of pipes, equipment, fixtures, conduit, ducts, openings, switches, outlets, etc., that there be no interferences between the installation or progress of the work of any Contractor on the project.
240-294 3603 11-03
• The electrical drawings are diagrammatic and shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the building and the work of other trades will allow. All changes from drawings necessary to make the work of each Contractor conform to the building construction and the work of other trades shall be done at the appropriate Contractor's expense.
• Should any bidder consider that any requirement of these specifications and drawings will make the effective operation of any portion or the whole installation impossible, or if he feels a vital component has been omitted, he must describe in his bid changes he deems necessary. Failure to do so shall be considered as an agreement on the part of the bidder to guarantee the effective operation of the installation.
• All equipment shall be installed complete with all necessary fittings, supports, accessories, etc., as necessary for a complete installation, providing the desired function. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedure unless specifically stated otherwise.
• Nothing in these specifications or drawings shall be construed as directing any Contractor from deviating from any legally binding code or ordinance.
SUBMITTALS
• Sequence: The Contractor is required to submit four copies of the following types of information:
• Prior to ordering equipment: shop drawings/ component data.
• At the end of the project before final inspection: maintenance manuals, warranties, certificate of owner's instruction and a certificate of receipt of loose items.
• Maintenance manuals shall include shop drawings, wiring diagrams, operating instructions, lubrication instructions, maintenance instructions, parts lists, and test reports.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
• PRODUCT LISTING
• When two or more items of same material or equipment are required, they shall be of the same manufacturer. Product manufacturer uniformity does not apply to raw materials, bulk materials, wire, conduit, fittings, sheet metal, steel bar stock, welding rods, solder, fasteners, motors for dissimilar equipment units, and similar items used in work, except where indicated otherwise.
241-294 3603 11-03
• Provide products which are compatible within systems and other connected items.
• NAMEPLATE DATA
• Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power operated equipment. Indicate manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location.
PART 3 EXECUTION
OPENINGS AND SLEEVES IN CONSTRUCTION
• Most openings required in wall, floor, roof, ceiling, etc., construction for electrical work will be provided by the general Contractor in accordance with information furnished by the electrical Contractor. All sleeves, inserts, forms, etc., required for openings shall be furnished by the Contractor requiring same. The electrical Contractor shall be responsible for their size, fabrication and location. Where new work has been installed previous to this request, the general Contractor will do the necessary cutting and patching at the expense of the electrical Contractor.
PROTECTING SITE
• Provide adequate barricades, signs, torches, etc. as required during progress of the work. Observe all applicable regulations respecting safety provisions.
• Protect utilities, trees, shrubbery, fences, poles, sidewalks, curbs and all other property and surface structures from damage. Any items which are damaged shall be restored by the Contractor at his own expense.
MECHANICAL-ELECTRICAL COORDINATION
• Unless otherwise specified the electrical Contractor will furnish and install all conduit, wiring, disconnects, starter, overloads, holding coils, remote pushbutton stations, control switches, and pilot lights for all electrically operated mechanical equipment, including final connections.
• The mechanical Contractor shall provide and connect wiring for all control devices such as thermostats, pressure sensors, humidistats, etc., associated with the mechanical equipment, and shall install those items which due to their method of operation must be connected or integrated into the equipment. Items not attached to mechanical equipment, conduit, duct or piping shall be installed by the electrical Contractor. All wiring for mechanical control shall be provided and installed by the mechanical Contractor. The mechanical Contractor is responsible 242-294 3603 11-03
for coordinating his requirements with the electrical Contractor. Control diagrams shall be provided by the mechanical Contractor.
• Each Contractor shall consult with the electrical Contractor before ordering or installing electrical equipment and shall be responsible to insure the equipment installed is of proper size and type.
• After wiring is completed by the electrical Contractor, each mechanical Contractor shall inspect the appropriate wiring before motors are operated. If any discrepancies are discovered, the mechanical Contractor shall notify the owner in writing. The owner shall arrange to have changes made as required.
MOUNTING HEIGHTS TO COMPLY WITH ADA REGULATIONS
• Install all electrical components regulated by ADA regulations at heights required in areas of the building which comply with ADA regulations. Coordinate the height of any component not listed below.
• Electrical Components: • Light Switches: 48" max. (measured to top of box). • Receptacles and Telephone Jacks: 18" min. (measured from floor to center of box). • Thermostats: 48" max. (measured from floor to top of box). • Audio/Visual Warning Devices: 80" max. (measured from floor to center of device).
STRUCTURAL CONDITIONS
• These specifications and the drawings accompanying same are intended to cover an installation which will not interfere with the structural design of the building, which will fit into the several available spaces, and which will insure a complete and satisfactory mechanical and electrical system.
• Each bidder shall carefully examine the plans for all branches of the work and shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the building.
• Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those shown on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor’s) own expense.
OWNER INSTRUCTIONS
243-294 3603 11-03
• Each Contractor shall instruct the owner's representative in the operation and maintenance of each system. Instruction periods shall be at the convenience of the owner. Submit a letter signed by the owner certifying satisfactory completion of instructional activities.
FINAL INSPECTION
• Final inspection will be made only after the Contractor certifies in writing that the work is 100% complete.
• A representative from each Contractor and sub-Contractor shall be present and be prepared to assist the owner in performing the inspection.
• A report describing incomplete or unacceptable work will be reviewed with the Contractor. The Contractor shall then certify to the owner in writing that such unacceptable or incomplete work is 100% corrected.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
• Before final application for payment will be accepted, Contractor must complete the following requirements:
• Final inspection performed and all corrections made.
• Submittal of maintenance manuals, certificate of owner instruction, equipment warranties and receipt for loose items.
244-294 3603 11-03
16110 - CONDUIT
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
• Metal conduit.
• Flexible metal conduit.
• Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
• Electrical metallic tubing.
• Nonmetal conduit.
• Electrical nonmetallic tubing.
• Flexible nonmetallic conduit.
• Fittings and conduit bodies.
RELATED SECTIONS
• Section 16130 - Boxes.
• Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding.
• Section 16190 - Supporting Devices.
• Section 16195 - Electrical Identification.
REFERENCES
• ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
• ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
• ANSI C80.5 - Rigid Aluminum Conduit.
• ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
• ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
• NECA "Standard of Installation."
245-294 3603 11-03
• NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit.
• NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80).
• NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
• Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
• Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inches.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
• Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
• Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
• Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site.
• Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
• Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering.
• Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
• Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
• Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.
• Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
246-294 3603 11-03
CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
• Minimum Size: 1/2 inch unless otherwise specified.
• Underground Installations: • More than Five Feet from Foundation Wall: Use thickwall nonmetallic conduit. • Within Five Feet from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit. • In or Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, Schedule 40 PVC conduit. • Minimum Size: 3/4 inch.
• Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use rigid steel, or intermediate metal conduit.
• In Slab Above Grade: • Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or Schedule 40 PVC conduit. No PVC conduit to extend above concrete. • Maximum Size Conduit in Slab: 3/4 inch; 1/2 inch for conduits crossing each other.
• Wet and Damp Locations: Use schedule 80 PVC conduit or PVC coated rigid conduit.
• Dry Locations: • Concealed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing in fabrication areas; electrical metallic tubing in office area. • Exposed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing in fabrication areas; electrical metallic tubing in office area.
METAL CONDUIT
• Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
• Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5.
• Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.
• Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.
PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT
• Manufacturers: • Robroy Plasti-Bond REDH2OT PVC coated conduit. • Substitutions of approved equals permitted.
247-294 3603 11-03
• Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 40 mil thick.
• Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to match conduit.
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
• Manufacturers: • Hubbell PolyTuff I with nonmetallic liquidtight connectors. • Substitutions of approved equals permitted.
• Description: Interlocked steel construction.
• Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
• Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
• Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
• Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
• Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; compression fittings only.
NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
• Manufacturers: • Carlon Plus 40 and Plus 80 rigid PVC conduit. • Substitutions of approved equals permitted.
• Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC.
• Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
NONMETALLIC TUBING
• Note: Conduit type ENT is NOT allowed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
248-294 3603 11-03
• Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
• Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
• Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
• Support conduit using steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers.
• Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits.
• Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 16190.
• Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports
• Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
• Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
• Route conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls.
• Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
• Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
• Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.
• Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F.
• Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.
• Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
• Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
• Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations.
249-294 3603 11-03
• Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.
• Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
• Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses control and expansion joints.
• Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.
• Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
• Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16170.
• Identify conduit under provisions of Section 16195.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
• Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements.
• Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation.
250-294 3603 11-03
16120 - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
• Building wire and cable.
• Nonmetallic-sheathed cable.
• Direct burial cable.
• Service entrance cable.
• Armored cable.
• Metal clad cable.
• Intercom/Speaker cable.
• Telephone cable.
• Computer cable
• Television cable
• Wiring connectors and connections.
RELATED SECTIONS
• Section 16195 - Electrical Identification.
• Section 16780 - Communications and Computer Systems.
REFERENCES
• NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association).
• NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
• NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
• TIA/EIA Standards 568, 568-A, 569, 570, 606, 607
QUALIFICATIONS
251-294 3603 11-03
• Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years experience.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
• Conform to NFPA 70.
• Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
• Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
• Conductor sizes are based on copper
• Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned.
COORDINATION
• Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and lengths required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
BUILDING WIRE
• Description: Single conductor insulated stranded wire.
• Conductor: Copper.
• Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
• Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THHN/THWN.
NONMETALLIC-SHEATHED CABLE
• Description: NFPA 70, Type NMC.
• Conductor: Copper.
• Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
DIRECT BURIAL CABLE
252-294 3603 11-03
• Description: NFPA 70, Type UF.
• Conductor: Copper.
• Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
• Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C.
• Underground Warning Tape: 4-inch wide plastic tape, colored red with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines.
SERVICE ENTRANCE CABLE
• Description: NFPA 70, Type SE or USE.
• Conductor: Copper.
• Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
• Insulation: Type RHH or XHHW or THHN.
ARMORED CABLE
• Description: NFPA 70, Type AC.
• Conductor: Copper.
• Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
• Insulation Temperature Rating: 75 degrees C.
• Insulation Material: Thermoplastic.
• Conductor Assembly Covering: Lead.
METAL CLAD CABLE
• Description: NFPA 70, Type MC.
• Conductor: Copper.
• Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
• Insulation Temperature Rating: 75 degrees C.
• Insulation Material: Thermoplastic.
253-294 3603 11-03
• Armor Material: Steel.
• Armor Design: Interlocked metal tape or Corrugated tube.
• Jacket: Where required.
INTERCOM/SPEAKER CABLE
• Description: UL Listed Type CL2.
• Conductor: Copper.
• Insulation Voltage Rating: 300 volts.
• Temperature Range: -20 deg C to 105 deg C.
• Insulation Material: PVC.
• Size: 22 gauge, single pair.
• Aluminum Foil Shield.
• Raceway: Not required.
TELEPHONE CABLE
• Description: Belden type 9566 or equal.
• Conductor: Copper.
• Insulation Voltage Rating: 300 volts.
• Insulation material: PVC.
• Size 24 gauge, 3 pair minimum.
• Unshielded
• Raceway: Not required.
COMPUTER CABLE
• Description: EIA/TIA 568 category 5 Belden type 1583A or equal, non-plenum rated.
254-294 3603 11-03
• Conductor: Copper.
• Insulation Rating: 300 volts.
• Insulation Material: PVC, blue.
• Size: 24 gauge, 4 pair twisted.
• Unshielded.
• Raceway: not required.
• Termination: At work area, terminate each 4 pair cable in an eight pin, modular jack. Connectors to be 100-ohm UTP outlets.
TELEVISION CABLE
• Description: 75 ohm coaxial cable, Belden type 9104 or equal, RG-59.
• Conductor: Copper.
• Insulation: Gas Injected.
• Jacket: PVC, black.
• Size: 20 gauge
• Shielded.
• Raceway: Not required.
PART 3 EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
• Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
• Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
• Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported.
PREPARATION
• Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.
WIRING METHODS
255-294 3603 11-03
• Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, THHN insulation, in raceway.
• Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN insulation, in raceway.
• Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THWN insulation, in raceway.
• Exterior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THWN insulation, in raceway.
• Underground Installations: Use only building wire, Type THWN insulation, in raceway.
• Use wiring methods indicated.
INSTALLATION
• Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions.
• Install cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation."
• Use stranded conductor for all feeders and branch circuits.
• Use stranded conductors for control circuits.
• Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
• Use conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits.
• Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet.
• Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet.
• Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.
• Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.
• Protect exposed cable from damage.
• Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels.
256-294 3603 11-03
• Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
• Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
• Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
• Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise.
• Use wedget connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor.
• Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller.
• Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller.
• Trench and backfill for direct burial cable installation. Install warning tape along entire length of direct burial cable, within 6 inches of grade.
• Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 16195. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation.
• Seal all penetrations of fire rated walls.
• All Category 5 cable drops shall be 295 feet or less, color-coded according to TIA/EIA 568, Section 10.2.1.1.3 and shall have no bends tighter than 6 times the OD of cable.
• TV terminations to be mounted in a standard cable face plate at height 84” AFF. Provide 120 volt receptacle within 12 inches of face plate at same height.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
• Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
• Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1.
• Category 5 cable shall meet requirements of TIA/EIA 568-A. Any cables failing test shall be replaced at Contractor’s expense.
257-294 3603 11-03
16130 - BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
• Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.
• Floor boxes.
• Pull and junction boxes.
RELATED SECTIONS
• Section 16140 - Wiring Devices: Wall plates in finished areas.
• Section 16160 – Circuit and Motor Disconnects.
REFERENCES
• NECA - Standard of Installation.
• NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
• NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
• NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports.
• NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
• NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
• Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
• Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
OUTLET BOXES
• Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
258-294 3603 11-03
• Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required.
• Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2.
• Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, aluminum. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs.
• Wall Plates for Finished Areas: as specified on the drawings.
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
• Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
• Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 16160.
PART 3 EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
• Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets prior to rough-in.
INSTALLATION
• Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
• Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.
• Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated.
• Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust box location up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose.
• Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 16140.
• Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance.
• Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
• Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
259-294 3603 11-03
• Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements.
• Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes.
• Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
• Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
• Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.
• Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.
• Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness.
• Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
• Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
• Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
• Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.
• Support boxes independently of conduit.
• Use gang or sectional box where more than one device is mounted together.
• Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
• Use cast outlet box in exterior locations and wet locations.
• Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable for other installations.
• Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast metal box in other locations.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
260-294 3603 11-03
• Coordinate installation of outlet box for equipment connected under other sections of this specification.
ADJUSTING
• Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
• Install knockout closures in unused box openings.
CLEANING
• Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
• Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
261-294 3603 11-03
16140 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
• Wall switches.
• Receptacles.
• Device plates and decorative box covers.
RELATED SECTIONS
• Section 16130 - Boxes.
REFERENCES
• NECA - Standard of Installation.
• NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices.
• NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements.
• NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
QUALIFICATIONS
• Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
• Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
• Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
EXTRA MATERIALS
• Furnish two of each style, size, and finish wall plate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
WALL SWITCHES
262-294 3603 11-03
• Single Pole Switch: • Hubbell HBL 1201 for classrooms and vestibules, color IVORY. • Leviton 1221-2IL Locking for restrooms, color IVORY.
• Double Pole Switch: • Hubbell HBL 1222, color GRAY.
• Three-way Switch: • Hubbell HBL 1203 for corridors, color IVORY. • Leviton 1223-2IL Locking for restrooms area, color IVORY.
• Substitutions: Approved equals except for key locking switches.
• Ratings: In all cases match branch circuit and load characteristics.
RECEPTACLES
• Duplex Convenience Receptacle: • Hubbell 5262 IVORY mounted at 18” AFF except where otherwise noted.
• GFCI Receptacle: • Hubbell GF5262 IVORY.
• Telephone Jack: • Hubbell 5110813 Category 5 Jack.
• Substitutions: Approved equals.
WALL PLATES
• Decorative Switch Cover Plate: • As specified on the Drawings.
• Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device cover. • Hubbell WPSF26. • Substitutions: permitted.
• Decorative Receptacle Plate: • As specified on the Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
• Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. 263-294 3603 11-03
• Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
• Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.
PREPARATION
• Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
• Clean debris from outlet boxes.
INSTALLATION
• Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
• Install devices plumb and level.
• Install switches with OFF position down.
• Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom.
• Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
• Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.
• Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
• Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
• Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16130 to obtain mounting heights specified and indicated on drawings.
• Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor.
• Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor unless noted otherwise.
• Install convenience receptacle 10 inches above counter.
• Install telephone jack 18 inches above finished floor.
264-294 3603 11-03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
• Inspect each wiring device for defects.
• Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.
• Verify that each receptacle device is energized.
• Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.
• Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.
• Verify that each telephone jack is properly connected and circuit is operational.
• Verify that indicated computer jacks are properly connected and operational.
• Verify that television jacks are properly connected and operational.
ADJUSTING
• Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
CLEANING
• Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.
265-294 3603 11-03
16160 - CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS
PART 1 GENERAL
NOTE
• Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
SUBMITTALS
• Provide complete catalog data and drawings on all items of equipment.
MANUALS
• Include all submittal data in the operation and maintenance manuals.
SCOPE
• Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
• Unless otherwise noted or required, all disconnect switches shall be UL listed and shall meet NEMA Standard KS1-1983 for Type HD heavy duty switches. Switches shall be unfused unless noted otherwise; quick make, quick break; in NEMA 3R enclosures if exposed to the weather; elsewhere in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless special enclosures are required. All motor circuit switches shall be horsepower rated.
• Switches shall be Square D or equivalent. 20 amp, single pole disconnects shall be equal 2510 KG-1. Three pole disconnects shall be equal to Square D class 3110.
• Where space does not permit use of the above specified switches, such as within weatherproof fan housings, etc., use suitable horsepower rated tumbler switches as unfused disconnects.
• Where disconnect switches are used to disconnect starters, provide auxiliary poles in switches as required to disconnect all auxiliary control circuits in starters.
PART 3 EXECUTION
266-294 3603 11-03
INSTALLATION
• Install disconnects directly on Roof Top Unit cabinets. Do not install solely on stubbed conduit.
267-294 3603 11-03
16170 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
• Grounding electrodes and conductors.
• Equipment grounding conductors.
• Bonding.
REFERENCES
• NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association).
• NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
GROUNDING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• Metal underground water pipe.
• Metal frame of the building.
• Rod electrodes.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
• Grounding System Resistance: 10 ohms.
SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT
• Project Record Documents: Record actual grounding system resistance of components and grounding electrodes.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
• Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
• Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
ROD ELECTRODES
268-294 3603 11-03
• Material: Copper-clad steel.
• Diameter: 3/4 inch.
• Length: 10 feet.
EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS
• Manufacturers: • Erico Cadweld.
WIRE
• Material: Stranded copper.
• Foundation Electrodes: 2/0 AWG.
• Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
• Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rods.
INSTALLATION
• Install rod electrodes at service entrance and dry type transformers 25 KVA or larger. Install additional rod electrodes to a maximum of three (3) to achieve specified resistance to ground. Bond all electrodes together with #2 copper grounding conductor connected to service entrance grounding electrode.
• Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing.
• Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements.
• Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground.
• Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.
269-294 3603 11-03
• Isolated Grounding Conductor: From designated panel grounding bar, run isolated ground conductor continuously back to service entrance grounding electrode. Bond with exothermic weld.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
• Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
• Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.
270-294 3603 11-03
16190 - SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
• Conduit and equipment supports.
• Anchors and fasteners.
REFERENCES
• NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association).
• NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
• Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
• Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
• Materials and Finishes: Corrosion resistant.
• Select materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit.
• Anchors and Fasteners: • Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts. • Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, spring steel clips, steel ramset fasteners, and welded fasteners. • Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors. • Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners. • Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts. • Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. • Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
271-294 3603 11-03
• Locate and install anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation".
• Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
• Do not use powder-actuated anchors without permission from Owner.
• Do not drill or cut structural members without permission from Owner.
• Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel members. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.
• Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
• In wet and damp locations use galvanized steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch off wall.
• Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions.
272-294 3603 11-03
16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
• Nameplates and labels.
• Wire and cable markers.
• Conduit markers.
REFERENCES
• NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
• Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
• Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
• Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
• Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background.
• Locations: • Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. • Communication cabinets.
• Letter Size: • 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. • 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
• Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black background. Use only for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles, control device stations.
273-294 3603 11-03
WIRE MARKERS
• Description: Cloth tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers.
• Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and each load connection.
• Legend: • Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated. • Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams. • Phase.
• All conductors and branch circuits shall be color coded as herein specified and strictly in accordance with Article 210 of the National Electric Code.
• All conductors connected to a 120/240 volt power distribution system shall be color coded as follows:
Phase 1 - Black Phase 2 - Red Phase 3 - Blue Neutral - White Ground - Green
• All conductors connected to a 277/480 volt power distribution systems shall be color coded as follows:
Phase 1 - Brown Phase 2 - Yellow Phase 3 - Purple Neutral - Grey Ground - Green
• All conductors larger than No. 6 may be color coded by taping of black conductors with the proper color tape where exposed in panel boxes, junction boxes, terminal boxes, etc.
• All conductors intended solely for grounding of equipment and devices shall be green unless indicated on the drawings to be bare. Green colored conductors shall not be used for other than grounding purposes. All conductors No. 6 and smaller shall be of the colors hereinbefore specified without exceptions. Under no circumstances shall green or white be used for any conductors other than for ground or grounded neutral conductors, respectively. Where 3-phase circuits are connected to 3-phase motors, temporary connections shall be made at motor
274-294 3603 11-03
terminals to determine proper rotation and any reversing of phases shall be done at the motor terminals in order to maintain proper color coding of phase conductors.
UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
• Description: 6-inch wide x 4-mil thick minimum plastic tape, colored red with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines.
• Location: Along length of each underground conduit.
PART 3 EXECUTION
PREPARATION
• Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
INSTALLATION
• Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines.
• Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws or adhesive.
• Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations.
• Identify underground conduits using one underground warning tape per trench at 12 inches below finished grade.
• Operational Identification and warnings: Wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and maintenance of electrical systems, and electrically connected mechanical systems and general systems, and to prevent misuse by unauthorized personnel, install self-adhesive plastic signs or similar equivalent identification, instruction or warnings on switches, outlets and other • controls, devices and covers of electrical enclosures.
275-294 3603 11-03
16420 - UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
• Arrangement with Utility Company for permanent electric service including payment of Utility Company charges for service.
• Underground service entrance.
RELATED SECTIONS
• Section 16110 - Conduit.
• Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding.
REFERENCES
• ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• Utility Company: West Texas Utilities Co., San Angelo, Texas
QUALITY ASSURANCE
• Perform Work in accordance with Utility Company written requirements.
• Maintain one copy of each document on site.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
• Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
• Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 PRODUCTS
UTILITY METERS
• Meters will be furnished by Contractor.
UTILITY METER BASE
• Meter base will be furnished by Contractor. Contractor to install on building.
276-294 3603 11-03
CT CABINET
• CT Cabinet will be finished by Utility Company. Contractor to install as specified on the Drawings, if needed.
MAIN OUTDOOR DISCONNECT SWITCH
• Square D type Q2-3225 NRB for switches 225 AMP and below.
• Square D type LA400R for 400 AMP switch.
• Square D type I-Line panel for installation requiring more than one breaker or switch.
PART 3 EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
• Verify that service equipment is ready to be connected and energized.
PREPARATION
• Make arrangements with Utility Company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project.
• Coordinate location of Utility Company's facilities to ensure proper access is available.
INSTALLATION
• Install service entrance conduits from utility metering equipment and provide trenching for all service conduits.
• Install main outdoor disconnect switch for each service entering a building. Paint to match building exterior.
277-294 3603 11-03
16470 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
• Distribution panelboards.
• Branch circuit panelboards.
• Load centers.
RELATED SECTIONS
• Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding.
• Section 16195 - Electrical Identification.
REFERENCES
• NECA Standard of Installation (published by the National Electrical Contractors Association).
• NEMA AB1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
• NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies.
• NEMA KS1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).
• NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards.
• NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
• NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment (published by the International Electrical Testing Association).
• NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
• Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.
278-294 3603 11-03
SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT
• Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting arrangements in project record documents.
• Maintenance Data: Include spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
• Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
• Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
• Furnish two each panelboard key.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
• Manufacturers: • Square D Type I-LINE or approved equal.
• Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type. Feeder breakers are to have individual plug-in mounting. Panel is to accept future breakers designed to attach directly to the vertical bus bars without the use of special kits, or special mounting modules.
• Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard. • Minimum integrated short circuit rating: 42,000 amps symmetrical on 240 volt or 208 volt applications.
• Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Provide interlock to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate Class R fuses.
• Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits.
279-294 3603 11-03
• Molded Case Circuit Breakers with Current Limiters: NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with replaceable current limiting elements, in addition to integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole.
• Circuit Breaker Accessories: Trip units and auxiliary switches as indicated.
• Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1.
• Cabinet Front: Surface type, fastened with hinge and latch, finished in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
• Manufacturers: • Square D Type NF for 480 volt and NQOD for 240 or 208 volt or approved equal.
• Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard. All lighting panels are to be of the same manufacture as distribution panels.
• Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard.
• Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 22,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240 or 208 volt panelboards; 22,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards.
• Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles, listed as Type HID for high intensity discharge lighting circuits, Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.
• Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1.
• Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide.
• Cabinet Front: Surface cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
LOAD CENTERS
• Manufacturers:
280-294 3603 11-03
• Square D Type QO Loadcenters or approved equal.
• Description: Circuit breaker load center, with bus ratings as indicated. Load centers are to be of the same manufacture as distribution panels.
• Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical.
• Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, plug-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles, listed as Type HID for high intensity discharge lighting circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where indicated. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.
• Enclosure: General Purpose.
• Box: Surface type with door, and pull ring and latch. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
• Install panelboards in plumb accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and the NECA "Standard of Installation."
• Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than 4 inches above floor.
• Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
• Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads.
• Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195.
• Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 16170.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
• Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
• Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.4 for switches, Section 7.5 for circuit breakers.
ADJUSTING
281-294 3603 11-03
• Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.
282-294 3603 11-03
16510 - LUMINAIRES
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
• Interior luminaires and accessories.
• Exterior luminaires and accessories.
• Emergency lighting units.
• Exit signs.
• Ballasts.
• Fluorescent lamp emergency power supply.
• Lamps.
• Luminaire accessories.
• Motion Detectors (occupancy sensors).
REFERENCES
• ANSI C78.379 - Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High-Intensity Discharge Reflector Lamps - Classification of Beam Patterns.
• ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications.
• ANSI C82.4 - Ballasts for High-Intensity Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple Supply Type).
• NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.
• NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
• NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
• Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer.
• Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
283-294 3603 11-03
SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT
• Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for each product.
QUALIFICATIONS
• Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
• Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
• Conform to requirements of NFPA 101.
• Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
EXTRA PRODUCTS
• Furnish two of each plastic lens type.
• Furnish one replacement lamps for each lamp type.
• Furnish one replacement motion detector for each sensor type.
• Furnish two of each ballast type.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
LUMINAIRES
• Manufacturers: • Lithonia. • Hubbell. • Cooper. • Substitutions: Permitted.
• Size and Type: As scheduled.
EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
• Furnish products as specified in schedules.
284-294 3603 11-03
EXIT SIGNS
• Furnish products as specified in schedules.
FLUORESCENT BALLASTS
• Manufacturers: • Howard. • Advance. • Substitutions: Permitted.
• Furnish products as specified in schedules.
HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) BALLASTS
• Furnish products as specified in schedules.
LAMPS
• Lamp Types: As specified for luminaire. Refer to schedules.
• Reflector Lamp Beam Patterns: ANSI C78.379.
• Fluorescent lamps to be warm white, 3500 deg. K, T8.
MOTION DETECTORS (NOT USED)
• Manufacturers: • Watt Stopper • Substitutions: Permitted.
• Size and Type: Dual Technology Sensor DT-100L combining passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies. Unit to provide user-specified time delay, adjustable sensitivity, LED display. Occupancy sensor shall control lighting in the sensed area only.
• Power Supply: A120E-P capable of switching a 20 amp ballast load. Power supply shall be capable of parallel wiring without regard to AC phases on primary.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
• Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.
285-294 3603 11-03
• Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling framing. • Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.
• Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.
• Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency lighting units and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings.
• Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
• Connect luminaires, emergency lighting units and exit signs to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 16130.
• Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire.
• Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
• Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire.
• Locate and aim occupancy sensor in correct location for coverage of room. The Contractor shall provide additional sensors if required to properly cover the room. Connect switch leg through power supply of sensor for correct operation.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
• Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation.
ADJUSTING
• Aim and adjust luminaires as indicated.
• Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated.
• Position motion detectors as required to minimize false operation.
CLEANING
• Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
• Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.
286-294 3603 11-03
• Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
• Clean finishes and touch up damage.
DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
• Demonstrate luminaire operation for a minimum of two hours.
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
• Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion.
287-294 3603 11-03
16530 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
• Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections apply to this Section.
• 16000, GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
• This section includes the furnishing, installation, and connection of the exterior lighting.
SUBMITTALS:
• Furnish the following:
• Shop Drawings:
• Include sufficient information, clearly presented, to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.
• Include electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting, material, required clearances, terminations, wiring and connection diagrams, photometric data, ballasts, luminaires, lamps and controls.
• Manuals: Provide complete operating and maintenance manuals, including technical data sheets, and information for ordering replacement parts.
APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:
• The following specification and standards, except as hereinafter modified, are incorporated herein by reference and form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the references thereto. Except where a specific date is given, the issue in effect (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) on the date of Invitation for Bids shall be applicable. In text such specifications and standards are referred to by basic designation only.
• American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
D3487...... Mineral Insulating Oil Used in Electrical Apparatus
288-294 3603 11-03
• American Concrete Institute (ACI):
No. 318...... Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
• American National Standards
C-57.12...... General Requirements For Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers.
C-81.10...... Electrical Lamp Bases and Holders.
• National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
No. 70...... National Electrical Code (NEC)
• Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
No. 57...... Electric Lighting Fixtures
No. 496...... Edison - Base Lampholders
No. 542...... Lampholders, Starters, and Starter Holders for Fluorescent Lamps
No. 773...... Photocontrols, Plug-in Locking-Type, for Use with Area and Roadway Lighting
No. 935...... Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts
No. 1029...... High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts
PART 2 PRODUCTS
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT, GENERAL:
• Material and equipment shall be in accordance with NEC, UL, ANSI, as shown on the drawings, and as specified.
LUMINAIRES:
• Shall be weatherproof outdoor types designed for efficient light utilization, adequate dissipation of lamp and ballast heat and safe cleaning and relamping.
• Lamp sockets for high intensity discharge (H.I.D.) fixture shall have locking type porcelain enclosures in conformance to the applicable requirements of ANSI C- 81.
• Pre-wire internal components to terminal strips at the factory. 289-294 3603 11-03
HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE BALLASTS:
• Ballasts shall be the high efficiency, high power factor, constant wattage type.
• Design ballasts to operate the discharge lamp of the type and wattage shown on the drawings.
• Ballasts shall have individual overcurrent protection as recommended by the ballast manufacturer.
• Ballasts shall be capable of providing reliable starting of the lamps at the lowest temperatures normally experienced at the construction site.
LAMPS:
• Install the proper lamps in every luminaire installed.
• Lamps to be general-service, outdoor lighting types. Mercury vapor lamps shall be deluxe white type. Mercury vapor lamps in open or louvered fixtures mounted less than 15 feet above the grade (or finished floor) shall be of the safety type in which the arc will automatically extinguish if the outer glass envelope becomes broken.
CONTROLS:
• Controls shall operate at 120 volts, 60 Hz.
• Each Lighting System:
• Shall be controlled by one of the following methods as shown for each system on the drawings:
• A photocell to directly control the lighting circuit. Photocell shall be the type which fails safe to the closed position.
• Mount and connect photocells as shown on the drawings.
• Photocells shall have the following features:
• Quick-response, cadmium sulfide type.
• A 15-30 second, built-in time delay to prevent response to momentary lighting flashes, car headlights or cloud movements.
290-294 3603 11-03
• Energizes the system when the north sky light decreases to approximately 1.5 foot-candles, and maintains the system energized until the north sky light increases to approximately 3 to 5 foot-candles.
• Minimum 1000 watt rating.
• The arrangement and method of control and the control devices shall be shown on the drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION:
• Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, and as shown on the drawings.
291-294 3603 11-03
16780 - COMMUNICATIONS AND COMPUTER SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
• Equipment mounting.
• Premises wiring and outlets.
RELATED SECTIONS
• Section 16110 - Conduit.
• Section 16120 - Building Wire and Cable
REFERENCES
• EIA/TIA-568 - Commercial Building Wiring Standard.
• EIA/TIA-569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunication Pathways and Spaces.
• T-568B - Standard for Computer Wiring.
• NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• Backbone Pathway: Conform to EIA/TIA 569.
• Horizontal Pathway: Conform to EIA/TIA 569.
• Premises Wiring: Complete from equipment to each outlet, using wire and cable as specified.
QUALIFICATIONS
• Installer: Company specializing in installing telephone premises wiring with minimum 3 years experience.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
• Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
292-294 3603 11-03
• Furnish Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
• Furnish service and maintenance of premises wiring for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS
• Provide two of each type of outlet jack.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
TELEPHONE TERMINATION BACKBOARDS
• Material: Plywood. Install backboard as required for new service.
• Size: 8 x 4 feet, 3/4 inch thick.
WIRE AND CABLE
• Refer to Section 16120 for complete description of all cables.
WIRING DEVICES
• Computer terminations: Leviton Quick Port modules or equal. Provide modules for Cat 5 connector in dataport wall plate as required.
• Telephone terminations: Leviton Quick Port modules or equal. Provide modules for RJ-11 telephone jacks in dataport wall plate as required.
• Television terminations: Leviton Quick Port modules or equal. Provide modules for RG-59 coaxial connectors in dataport wall plate as required.
WIRING CLOSETS
• Location designated on drawings to contain jack strips mounted minimum of 84” AFF. Locate 120 volt receptacle adjacent to jack strip.
PATCH PANELS
• The transmission properties of internally wired connecting devices shall meet or exceed those specified in TIA/EIA 568, Section 12.2.6.2.
293-294 3603 11-03
• Standard interface jack and plugs shall meet the requirements of TIA/EIA-TSB- 31, Ref B 1.37.
• Interface jacks shall be eight pin jacks with pin/pair assignments according to the 568A designation with applicable color code combinations. These pin/pair assignments to be compatible with ISDN BRI (ISO 8877), Ref B 1.24.
PART 3 EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
• Install wire and cable in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with EIA/TIA 568. Insure that standard T-568B is adhered to for all Category 5 installations.
• Finish termination backboards with durable white enamel prior to installation of telephone equipment.
• Support raceways, backboards, and cabinets.
• Install termination backboards and cabinets plumb, and attach securely to building wall at each corner.
• Install polyethylene pulling string in each empty telephone conduit.
• Mark all telephone backboards with the legend "TELEPHONE" under the provisions of Section 16195.
• Install category 5 cable and other cable as required to each box serving telephone or computer outlets. Install category 5 cable from outlet to electrical room to location designated by Owner.
• All communications and computer outlets to have minimum 1” conduit stubbed to 6” above ceiling.
294-294 3603 11-03